Family 2834+03 IBM DS8880 Models 984/84E, 985/85E, and 986/86E
IBM United States Sales ManualRevised: September 14, 2021
| Table of contents | ||||||||||||||||||||
|
Product life cycle dates
| Type Model | Announced | Available | Marketing Withdrawn | Service Discontinued |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 2834-84E | 2016-11-02 | 2016-12-09 | 2020-06-30 | - |
| 2834-85E | 2016-11-02 | 2016-12-09 | 2020-06-30 | - |
| 2834-86E | 2016-11-02 | 2016-12-09 | 2020-06-30 | - |
| 2834-984 | 2016-11-02 | 2016-12-09 | 2020-06-30 | - |
| 2834-985 | 2016-11-02 | 2016-12-09 | 2020-06-30 | - |
| 2834-986 | 2016-11-02 | 2016-12-09 | 2020-06-30 | - |
Back to top
Abstract
The IBM DS8880 offers a hardware peripheral, High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2, to address the exploitation of high-performance online transaction processing (OLTP) and analytics and helping to optimize cost, maximize performance, and provide security.
The IBM DS8880 family offers High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 with the introduction of six new models that can be ordered with one, two, three, or four years of support which covers both the hardware and advanced function features:
- DS8884 Model 984 with its associated DS8884 Expansion Unit Model 84E
- DS8886 Model 985 with its associated DS8886 Expansion Unit Model 85E
- DS8886 Model 986 with its associated DS8886 Expansion Unit Model 86E
These model systems include a one-year standard warranty. Up to three additional years of extended warranty services are available, offering flexible options to best address business and financial needs. Clients should consult with their financial personnel on the appropriate financial treatment for this offering.
These models will be the replacement of previous models 980 and 981. The details of the configuration supported for the new models can be found in the Description section.
High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2
The flash enclosure and flash RAID adapter deliver improved performance and capacity compared to the previous generation flash enclosure. The 2U flash enclosures are configured in pairs with each enclosure supporting up to twenty-four 2.5-inch flash cards in capacities ranging from 400 GB to 3.2 TB. The maximum flash capacity for the DS8886 increases from 96 TB to 614.4 TB, delivering reduced storage costs through lesser cost per IOPS with this new flash enclosure.
The next-generation flash RAID controller delivers significantly increased performance. Each flash adapter pair delivers up to 500K IOPS and up to 14 GBps and 10.5 GBps for read and write bandwidth respectively (for two High Performance Flash Enclosure pairs). High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 offers up to four times better performance as compared to previous High Performance Flash Enclosure.
RAID 6 default RAID type
RAID 6 will be the default RAID type for all drive types available on the High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 models. RAID 6 will dramatically improve the availability of arrays, especially as drive capacity increases.
Other capabilities and enhancements
IBM DS8880 (machine types 2831, 2832, 2833, and 2834) also delivers more capabilities for new and existing customers, including:
- Customer-defined digital certificates for authentication
- Extents level space release support for z/OS
- Configurable Hardware Management Console (HMC) firewall support
- DSCLI support for z/OS environment
- FICON Information Unit (IU) pacing improvements
Model abstract 2834-984
IBM 2834 DS8884 Model 984 features a 6-core processor, 499.2 TB (base model fully populated) to 1.68 PB physical capacity (with 1.8 TB SFF HDDs and 3.2 TB flash cards), 192 to 768 SFF disk drives and 48 to 96 flash cards (maximum obtained when 84E expansions are attached), 64 GB to 256 GB processor memory, 2 to 16 host adapters (including those in the first 84E expansion), and up to two 84E attach.
Model abstract 2834-84E
IBM 2834 associated DS8884 Expansion Unit Model 84E has 585.6 TB (with 240 SFF disk drives of 1.8 TB capacity and 48 flash cards of 3.2 TB capacity) in the first expansion, 604.8 TB physical capacity (with 336 SFF disk drives of 1.8 TB capacity) in the second expansion, 240 and 336 disk drives for up to two expansions respectively, 0 to 8 host adapters in the first expansion (for a total of up to 16 host adapters including those in the base model), and attaches to Model 984.
Model abstract 2834-985
IBM 2834 DS8886 Model 985 features a 8-core to 24-core per complex processor, 566.4 TB (base model fully populated) to 3.37 PB physical capacity (with 1.8 TB SFF HDDs and 3.2 TB flash cards), 144 to 1536 disk drives and 96 to 192 flash cards (maximum obtained when 84E expansions are attached), 128 GB to 2 TB processor memory, 2 to 32 host adapters (including those in the first 85E expansion), and from none to four 85E attach. Supports Single phase power.
Model abstract 2834-85E
IBM 2834 associated DS8886 Expansion Unit Model 85E has 739.2 TB (with 240 SFF disk drives of 1.8 TB capacity and 96 flash cards of 3.2 TB capacity) in the first expansion, 777.6 TB (with 432 SFF disk drives of 1.8 TB capacity) in the second and third expansions and 518.4 TB (with 288 SFF disk drives of 1.8 TB capacity) in the fourth expansion of physical capacity, 240, 432, 432, and 288 disk drives for up to four expansions respectively, 0 to 16 host adapters in the first expansion (for a total of up to 32 host adapters including those in the base model), and attaches to Model 985. Supports Single phase power.
Model abstract 2834-986
IBM 2834 DS8886 Model 986 features a 8-core to 24-core per complex processor, 172.8 TB (base model fully populated) to 3.37 PB physical capacity (with 1.8 TB SFF HDDs and 3.2 TB flash cards), 96 to 1440 disk drives and 96 to 192 flash cards (maximum obtained when 84E expansions are attached), 128 GB to 2 TB processor memory, 2 to 32 host adapters (including those in the first 86E expansion), and from none to four 86E attach. Supports three phase power.
Model abstract 2834-86E
IBM 2834 associated DS8886 Expansion Unit Model 86E has 652.8 TB (with 192 SFF disk drives of 1.8 TB capacity and 96 flash cards of 3.2 TB capacity) in the first expansion, 691.2 TB (with 384 SFF disk drives of 1.8 TB capacity) in the second, third, and fourth expansions of physical capacity, 192, 384, 384, and 384 disk drives for up to four expansions respectively, 0 to 16 host adapters in the first expansion (for a total of up to 32 host adapters including those in the base model), and attaches to Model 986. Supports three phase power.
Back to top
Highlights
IBM DS8880 offers six new models with support for High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 to deliver more processing power and flash capacity for software applications that require high performance. Clients have a choice to deploy flash with enterprise disk (DS8884 or DS8886) to handle their critical business data.
IBM DS8880 (machine types 2831, 2832, 2833, and 2834) also delivers more capabilities for new and existing customers, including:
- Customer-defined digital certificates for authentication
- Extents level space release support for z/OS
- Configurable Hardware Management Console (HMC) firewall support
- DSCLI support for z/OS environment
- FICON Information Unit (IU) pacing improvements
Back to top
Description
High-capacity flash drive set
IBM DS8880 offers a high-capacity 1.92 TB flash drive set (feature number 1622) to expand the capacity options for the business class DS8882F and DS8884F offerings.
This high-capacity flash drive is in addition to the already supported 400 GB, 800 GB, 1.6 TB, and 3.2 TB high-performance flash drive sets, and 3.84 TB, 7.68 TB, and 15.36 TB high-capacity flash drives.
Intermixing of high-performance and high-capacity flash drives in the same enclosure is not supported.
The 1.92 TB flash card expands the capacity options for the business class DS8882F and DS8884F offerings, providing a low capacity alternative at competitive cost within high-capacity flash drives.
High-capacity flash drive set
IBM DS8880 offers a new high-capacity 15.36 TB flash drive set (feature number 1625) to provide additional performance options with flexible capacity to address application and business requirements.
This high-capacity flash drive is in addition to the already supported 400 GB, 800 GB, 1.6 TB, and 3.2 TB high-performance flash drive sets, and 3.84 TB and 7.68 TB high-capacity flash drives.
Intermixing of high-performance and high-capacity flash drives in the same enclosure is not supported.
With this added flash option, the maximum flash storage capacity supported per flash enclosure pair is 737.28 TB raw.
Enable write operations for zHyperLink
zHyperLink is a short distance, mainframe attach link. zHyperLink is intended to accelerate Db2 12 for z/OS, update intensive transaction processing, and improve active log write for z/OS. zHyperLink technology delivers low latency by using a new short distance link technology which compliments transactional SAN attached DS8880/F systems. Low latency read and write operations are provided for storage systems within the 150-meter distance requirement using a point to point link from the z14 to the DS8880/F I/O bay. Low I/O latencies deliver value through improved workload elapsed times and faster transactional response times, and contribute to lower scaling costs. The DS8880/F implementation of zHyperLink I/O delivers service times fast enough to enable a synchronous I/O model in high- performance IBM Z servers. zHyperLink writes accelerates Db2 12 for z/OS transaction processing.
Restrictions
- The zHyperLink write capability supports Metro Mirror and HyperSwap within 150-meter distances.
- Asynchronous replication (Global Mirror, zGlobal Mirror (XRC), Global Copy), Safeguarded Copy, DS8882F, and any other 6-core configurations are not supported for zHyperLink write operations.
IBM Storage Insights
With the basic version available at no charge, cloud-based IBM Storage Insights provides a single dashboard that gives you a clear view of all your IBM block storage, including IBM DS8880. You will be able to make better decisions by seeing trends in performance and capacity. Storage Insights simplifies uploading logs, speeds resolution with online configuration data, and provides an overview of open tickets, all in one place.
IBM DS8880 is introducing the next-generation Call Home infrastructure that enables continuous updates of the system's configuration and health, helping both you and IBM support to be aware of areas needing attention.
High-capacity flash drive set
IBM DS8880 offers a new high-capacity 7.68 TB flash drive set (feature number 1624) to provide additional performance options with flexible capacity to address application and business requirements.
This high-capacity flash drive is in addition to the already supported 400 GB, 800 GB, 1.6 TB, and 3.2 TB high-performance flash drive sets, and the 3.84 TB high-capacity flash drive.
Easy Tier has been enhanced to support the use of high-capacity flash drives and will treat them as a separate tier when combined with high-performance flash drives. This enables both types of flash drives to be contained in the same storage pool with Easy Tier promoting the most active data to the high-performance flash drives.
Intermixing of high-performance and high-capacity flash drives in the same enclosure is not supported.
With this added flash option, the maximum flash storage capacity supported per flash enclosure pair is 368.64 TB raw.
FlashCopy support in Transparent Cloud Tiering
Transparent Cloud Tiering currently supports migration and recall of data to simplex and volumes participating in a metro mirrored relationship. This provides the capability to recall data and maintain disaster recovery and high availability positions.
Transparent Cloud Tiering is adding support for migration and recall of data to volumes that are in a FlashCopy relationship, broadening its capabilities and use cases.
IBM Storage Enabler for Containers support
Container technology is a new, up-and-coming technology which enables prepackaged and configured software to be deployed easily in any environment. This simple, flexible technology fits perfectly with the advantages of private and public cloud computing environments.
Due to this lightweight and flexible capability, containers historically have used short-term storage for the application within. As adoption for this grows, there is an inherent need for enterprise capabilities such as disaster recovery, concurrent upgrades, and container movement within the hybrid cloud environment.
IBM Storage Enabler for Containers software, in conjunction with IBM Spectrum Connect 3.4 and an orchestration layer such as Kubernetes or IBM Cloud Private, enables an application to store data separate from the container itself, in persistent, highly available DS8880 block storage.
Transparent cloud tiering
Cloud object storage delivers a solution to consolidate and store various types of unstructured data that is both dense and cost effective, whether on-premise using IBM Cloud Object Storage or a public or hybrid cloud.
IBM DS8880 offers transparent cloud tiering, a software feature that enables users to migrate and recall data directly from the DS8880 to cloud object storage without the data going through the mainframe. With tight integration with IBM DFSMS software, data continues to be managed by DFSMShsm without major changes in the operational model.
The combination of server-less data movement through DS8880 and the efficiencies in DFSMS enable a reduction in CPU processing and frees up MIPS for use by other applications. This also helps with data management across the enterprise system by adding another tier for which cold data can be archived to. With transparent cloud tiering, this additional tier will enable an IBM TS7700 to be the target of DFSMShsm migration data.
Transparent cloud tiering is a software-only enhancement and does not require additional DS8000 hardware as it uses the existing Ethernet ports on DS8000 servers. Microcode support for this function is available for R8.2.3. This support also requires z/OS V2R1 with APAR OA51622 or z/OS V2R2 with APAR OA50667.
In this release, only ECKD data format type is supported and use is restricted to simplex devices only. Configuration to connect the DS8880 to cloud object storage is performed using DSCLI and ISMF panels via a new SMS construct in z/OS.
UNMAP command (VMware support)
VAAI Thin Provisioning Block Space Reclamation (UNMAP) Primitive feature is introduced in vSphere 5.0. This feature is designed to efficiently reclaim deleted space to meet continuing storage needs.
The VMware host will notify the storage device about freed space on a thin-provisioned LUN by sending a SCSI Unmap command. DS8880 will release any entire extents that have been allocated within that freed space.
On DS8880, the extent size is either 16 MB for small extents or 1 GB for large extents. Therefore, for any space to be released, the request must be for at least 16 MB. If the request is not aligned on extent boundaries, then only full extents contained within the requested range will be released.
The UNMAP command can help improve the efficiency of storage management and released space can be claimed for use by other applications.
This function is available for R8.2.3 and also required ESXi version 5.0, or higher, on the host.
IBM DS8880 introduces six models integrated with the High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair to handle complex workloads and deliver exceptional performance for mission-critical business environments.
The integration of the High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 delivers a new and even higher standard of flash performance compared with the previous high-performance flash enclosure. High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 is directly attached to the PCIe fabric, enabling increased bandwidth and transaction processing capabilities. The 4U enclosure pair contains two powerful, redundant flash RAID controllers and up to 48 SAS flash cards. The flash RAID controller is specifically designed to help unleash the performance capabilities of flash-based storage. The flash RAID controller design combines the technical expertise of IBM research and development resources, and includes common building blocks with the FlashSystem.
The flash enclosure pair (feature number 1600) in these models offer up to four times the performance of current flash. The flash enclosure pair can support up to three drive sets, and each drive set has 16 flash cards.
These flash cards are offered in several capacity options:
- 400 GB (feature number 1610)
- 800 GB (feature number 1611)
- 1.6 TB (feature number 1612)
- 3.2 TB (feature number 1613)
The flash cards used in the High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair are packaged as 2.5-inch SAS encryption-capable cards which can be added or removed concurrently while the enclosure pair is in use. The flash cards can be configured as RAID 5, 6, and 10 arrays.
Each High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair supports a pair of RAID controllers in an active/active configuration. The pair of controllers are fully redundant and offer complete, nondisruptive maintenance. The DS8880 offers two types of configurations:
- Up to 153.6 TB of raw capacity in a 4U space for DS8884 models 984 and 84E
- Up to 307.2 TB of raw capacity in a 8U space for DS8886 models 985, 986, 85E, and 86E
Refer to the following table for more information about supported flash and adapter counts with the three available configuration options.
Per frame maximum configuration table:
Model Core per Physical Disk Processor Host 9xE Flash
Processor capacity drives/Flash memory adapters attach enclosure
Complex (1) cards pair
-------------------------------------------------------------------------
DS8884 configuration:
984 6-core 499.2 TB 192/48 64 GB 8 0 1
984 6-core 1.69 PB 768/96 256 GB 16 0 to 2 2
DS8886 configuration (single phase power):
985 8-core 566.4 TB 144/96 256 GB 16 0 2
985 16-core 3.38 PB 1,536/192 512 GB 32 0 to 4 4
985 24-core 3.38 PB 1,536/192 2048 GB 32 0 to 4 4
DS8886 configuration (three phase power):
986 8-core 480 TB 96/96 256 GB 16 0 2
986 16-core 3.21 PB 1,440/192 512 GB 32 0 to 4 4
986 24-core 3.21 PB 1,440/192 2048 GB 32 0 to 4 4
DS8884 configuration first expansion:
84E N/A 585.6 TB 240/48 N/A 8 984 1
DS8884 configuration second expansion:
84E N/A 604.8 TB 336 N/A 0 984 0
DS8886 configuration first expansion:
85E N/A 739.2 TB 240/96 N/A 16 985 2
DS8886 configuration second/third expansions:
85E N/A 777.6 TB 432 N/A 0 985 0
DS8886 configuration fourth expansion:
85E N/A 518.4 TB 288 N/A 0 985 0
DS8886 configuration first expansion:
86E N/A 652.8 TB 192/96 N/A 16 986 2
DS8886 configuration second/third/fourth expansions:
86E N/A 691.2 TB 384 N/A 0 986 0
Note: N/A = Not applicable
Note: (1) Physical capacity calculated with 1.8 TB SFF HDDs and 3.2 TB flash cards
RAID 6 default for all storage types
In this release, the default RAID type that will be configured for all types of drives is RAID6. This will deliver significant improvements in reliability compared to RAID5. RAID5 can be configured for drives of less than 1 TB, but this is not recommended and will require a risk acceptance. RAID10 will continue to be an option for all drive types.
Customer-defined digital certificates for authentication
DS8000 supports customer-defined digital certificates to control authentication for GUI, CSM, and Key Server network connections. A digital certificate can be loaded onto the DS8000 to replace the default factory certificate or to replace a previously uploaded certificate that is now obsolete.
Thin provisioning enhancements
Space release functionality at the extent level for ECKD volumes is now supported both for simplex volumes and Metro Mirror primaries in full duplex.
In order to provide additional options for data migration, Peer to Peer Remote Copy (Global Copy, Metro Mirror or Global Mirror) is fully supported between provisioned and thin-provisioned volumes. A thin-provisioned target device will become fully allocated during the synchronization process, but the space can be later released using the space release functionality.
Configurable HMC firewall
The configurable DS8880 HMC firewall enables you to restrict external network traffic such that only certain IP addresses can be communicated with. This is especially useful for configuring and securing remote access to the DS8880 HMC by accepting incoming network traffic from certain IP addresses only, for example customer-owned proxies and gateways.
DS8000 Series Command-Line Interface (DSCLI) support for z/OS environment
The DSCLI can be installed through Copy Services Manager (CSM) System Modification Program/Extended (SMPE) and run directly under UNIX System Services in a mainframe environment. With this enhancement, you can manage various DS8000 functions such as logical configuration and copy services, without having to perform multiple steps under a separate operating system. The DSCLI SMPE installable package is available when CSM (5698-E01 or 5698-E02) is ordered. DSCLI commands can also be executed directly through the DS8000 GUI.
Improvement of FICON IU pacing
IU pacing provides a flow control mechanism for FICON to manage the transmission of data across the Fibre Channel fabric. Once pacing credits for a port are exhausted, a frame pacing delay occurs which can limit the performance of a single read or write process. To improve FICON read and write performance, especially at longer distances and higher link rates, the IU pacing credits are increased to quadruple the current capability. The increased of pacing credits will only be supported on 4-port 16Gbps Fibre Channel adapters.
Accessibility by people with disabilities
A US Section 508 Voluntary Product Accessibility Template (VPAT) containing details on accessibility compliance can be found on the IBM Accessibility website.
Section 508 of the US Rehabilitation Act
IBM DS8880 storage family is capable as of December 9, 2016, when used in accordance with IBM's associated documentation, of satisfying the applicable requirements of Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act, provided that any assistive technology used with the product properly interoperates with it. A US Section 508 Voluntary Product Accessibility Template (VPAT) can be found on the IBM Accessibility website.
Back to top
Models
Model summary matrix
Base unit models
Physical capacity, flash cards, processor memory, and host adapter values represent the maximum configuration (on a model basis) and do not include the resources associated with any attached expansion units. Physical capacity considers 1.8 TB SFF HDDs and 3.2 TB flash cards.
| Model | Core Per Processor Complex | Physical capacity | Flash cards/Disk drives | Processor memory | Host adapters |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 984 | 6-core | 499.2 TB | 48/192 | 64 GB | 8 |
| 984 | 6-core | 1.68 PB | 96/768 | 256 GB | 16 |
| 985 | 8-core | 566.4 TB | 96/144 | 256 GB | 16 |
| 986 | 8-core | 172.8 TB | 96/96 | 256 GB | 16 |
| 985 | 16-core | 3.37 PB | 192/1536 | 512 GB | 32 |
| 985 | 24-core | 3.37 PB | 192/1536 | 2 TB | 32 |
| 986 | 16-core | 3.2 PB | 192/1440 | 512 GB | 32 |
| 986 | 24-core | 3.2 PB | 192/1440 | 2 TB | 32 |
Expansion unit models
Physical capacity, flash cards, processor memory, and host adapter values represent the maximum configuration (on a model basis) and do not include the resources associated with the base unit. Physical capacity considers 1.8 TB SFF HDDs and 3.2 TB flash cards.
DS8884 Configuration first expansion
| Model | Core Per Processor Complex | Physical capacity | Flash cards/Disk drives | Processor memory | Host adapters |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 84E | N/A | 585.6 TB | 48/420 | N/A | 16 |
DS8884 Configuration second expansion
| Model | Core Per Processor Complex | Physical capacity | Flash cards/Disk drives | Processor memory | Host adapters |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 84E | N/A | 604.8 TB | 0/336 | N/A | 0 |
DS8886 Configuration first expansion
| Model | Core Per Processor Complex | Physical capacity | Flash cards/Disk drives | Processor memory | Host adapters |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 85E | N/A | 739.2 TB | 96/240 | N/A | 16 |
DS8886 Configuration second and third expansion
| Model | Core Per Processor Complex | Physical capacity | Flash cards/Disk drives | Processor memory | Host adapters |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 85E | N/A | 777.6 TB | 0/432 | N/A | 0 |
DS8886 Configuration fourth expansion
| Model | Core Per Processor Complex | Physical capacity | Flash cards/Disk drives | Processor memory | Host adapters |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 85E | N/A | 518.4 TB | 0/288 | N/A | 0 |
DS8886 Configuration first expansion
| Model | Core Per Processor Complex | Physical capacity | Flash cards/Disk drives | Processor memory | Host adapters |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 86E | N/A | 652.8 TB | 96/192 | N/A | 16 |
DS8886 Configuration second, third, and fourth expansion
| Model | Core Per Processor Complex | Physical capacity | Flash cards/Disk drives | Processor memory | Host adapters |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 86E | N/A | 691.2 TB | 0/384 | N/A | 0 |
Customer setup (CSU)
The DS8000 is not designated as customer setup.
However, retrieval and installation of feature activation codes to activate licensed functions is a customer responsibility. Refer to IBM DS8000 Series - Function Authorizations (Machine types 283x) for more information.
Devices supported
Supported expansion units --------- 2834-84E 2834-85E 2834-86E
Information on servers, operating systems, host adapters, and connectivity products supported by the DS8000 series is available at the IBM System Storage DS8000 website.
Model conversions
Not available.
Feature conversions
Machine type 2834 Models 984, 985, and 986
From feature To Returned Description
feature parts(1)
--------------------------------- ------- -------- ---------------------
Disk enclosures:
1242 1244 No HD STD enclosure
indicator to 3.5-inch
disk enclosure
indicator
1242 1245 No HD STD enclosure
indicator to 400 GB
SSD enclosure
indicator
1242 1256 No HD STD enclosure
indicator to 800 GB
SSD enclosure
indicator
1242 1257 No HD STD enclosure
indicator to 1.6 TB
SSD enclosure
indicator
1245 1256 No SSD enclosure
indicator
1245 1257 No SSD enclosure
indicator
1256 1257 No SSD enclosure
indicator
Host adapters:
3153 3157 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3153 3253 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3153 3257 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3157 3153 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3157 3253 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3157 3257 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3253 3153 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3253 3157 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3253 3257 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3257 3153 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3257 3157 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3257 3253 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3353 3453 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3453 3353 Yes Host adapter
conversion
Encryption disk drive sets:
5308 5618 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5308 5708 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5308 5768 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5308 5778 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5308 5868 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5618 5708 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5618 5768 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5618 5778 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5618 5868 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5708 5618 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5708 5768 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5708 5778 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5708 5868 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5768 5778 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5868 5878 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
Encryption SSD drive sets:
6158 6258 Yes Encryption SSD drive
conversion
6158 6358 Yes Encryption SSD drive
conversion
6258 6358 Yes Encryption SSD drive
conversion
Encryption SAS to SSD drive sets:
5308 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5308 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5308 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5618 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5618 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5618 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5708 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5708 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5708 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5768 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5768 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5768 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5778 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5778 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5778 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5868 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5868 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5868 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5878 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5878 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5878 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
Machine type 2834 Model 984
From feature To Returned Description
feature parts(1)
----------------- ------- -------- ---------------------------
Processor memory:
4223 4224 No Processor memory conversion
4223 4225 No Processor memory conversion
4224 4225 No Processor memory conversion
Machine type 2834 Models 985 and 986
From feature To Returned Description
feature parts(1)
------------------------------------- ------- -------- -----------------
I/O cables:
1320 1321 Yes I/O cable
conversion
Processor memory:
4324 4325 No Processor memory
conversion
4324 4326 No Processor memory
conversion
4325 4326 No Processor memory
conversion
4325 4327 No Processor memory
conversion
4326 4327 No Processor memory
conversion
4326 4328 No Processor memory
conversion
4327 4328 Yes Processor memory
conversion
Processor License feature indicators:
4422 4423 No Processor License
feature
conversion
4422 4424 No Processor License
feature
conversion
4423 4424 No Processor License
feature
conversion
Machine type 2834 Models 84E, 85E, and 86E
From feature To Returned Description
feature parts(1)
--------------------------------- ------- -------- ---------------------
Disk enclosures:
1242 1244 No HD STD enclosure
indicator to 3.5-inch
disk enclosure
indicator
1242 1245 No HD STD enclosure
indicator to 400 GB
SSD enclosure
indicator
1242 1256 No HD STD enclosure
indicator to 800 GB
SSD enclosure
indicator
1242 1257 No HD STD enclosure
indicator to 1.6 TB
SSD enclosure
indicator
1245 1256 No SSD enclosure
indicator
1245 1257 No SSD enclosure
indicator
1256 1257 No SSD enclosure
indicator
Host adapters:
3153 3157 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3153 3253 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3153 3257 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3157 3153 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3157 3253 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3157 3257 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3253 3153 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3253 3157 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3253 3257 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3257 3153 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3257 3157 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3257 3253 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3353 3453 Yes Host adapter
conversion
3453 3353 Yes Host adapter
conversion
Encryption disk drive sets:
5308 5618 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5308 5708 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5308 5768 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5308 5868 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5308 5778 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5618 5708 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5618 5768 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5618 5868 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5618 5778 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5708 5618 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5708 5768 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5708 5868 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5708 5778 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5778 5868 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5768 5778 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
5868 5878 Yes Encryption disk drive
set conversion
Encryption SSD drive sets:
6158 6258 Yes Encryption SSD drive
conversion
6158 6358 Yes Encryption SSD drive
conversion
6258 6358 Yes Encryption SSD drive
conversion
Encryption SAS to SSD drive sets:
5308 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5308 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5308 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5618 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5618 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5618 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5708 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5708 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5708 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5768 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5768 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5768 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5778 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5778 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5778 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5868 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5868 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5868 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5878 6158 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5878 6258 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
5878 6358 Yes Encryption SAS to SSD
drive conversion
Machine type 2834 Models 984, 985,986, 84E, 85E, and 86E
From To Returned Description feature feature parts(1) ------- ------- -------- ---------------------- 1610 1611 Yes Flash cards conversion 1610 1612 Yes Flash cards conversion 1610 1613 Yes Flash cards conversion 1611 1612 Yes Flash cards conversion 1611 1613 Yes Flash cards conversion 1612 1613 Yes Flash cards conversion
Note: (1) Parts removed as a result of a feature conversion become the property of IBM.
Machine type 283x Model 984
From feature To Returned Description
feature parts(1)
----------------- ------- -------- ---------------------------
Processor memory:
4233 4234 No Processor memory conversion
4233 4235 No Processor memory conversion
4234 4235 No Processor memory conversion
Machine type 283x Models 985 and 986
From feature To feature Returned parts(1)Description ----------------- ---------- --------------- --------------------------- Processor memory: 4334 4335 No Processor memory conversion 4334 4336 No Processor memory conversion 4335 4336 No Processor memory conversion 4335 4337 No Processor memory conversion 4336 4337 No Processor memory conversion 4336 4338 No Processor memory conversion 4337 4338 Yes Processor memory conversion
Note: (1) Parts removed as a result of a feature conversion become the property of IBM.
Back to top
Technical description
 |
Physical specifications | |
Hardware requirements |
|
Operating environment | |
Software requirements |
|
Limitations | ||
The IBM DS8880 consists of eight new models, model 984, 985, 986 that represent the base unit and model 84E, 85E, 86E that represent the expansion units
Physical view
The physical configuration of the DS8880 consists of the following components:
- Base unit: The base unit DS8880 Model 98x provides the rack and packaging that contain a dual processor complex, host adapters, I/O enclosures, device adapters, power supplies, batteries, and cooling, as well as space for up to twelve drive sets that contain 16 disk drives. In addition to the drive sets, High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair that each flash enclosure pair contain 48 flash cards can be installed.
- Expansion unit: DS8880 Model 8xE provides the rack and packaging
for an additional up to four expansion frames and support up to
maximum of 1536 disk drives set in one system. In addition to the
thousand over drive sets another two flash enclosures pair that
contain 96 flash cards (in the second position model 85E and 86E),
one flash enclosure pair that contain 48 flash cards (in the second
position model 84E), can be installed.
Expansion frames in the second position can also contain additional host adapters, device adapters and I/O enclosures. They also contain their own set of power supplies, batteries, and cooling. Expansion frames can only be attached to DS8000 series (16-core or 24-core) controllers for model 85E and 86E.
- Host adapters: Host adapters provide the I/O connections between the DS8880 and server/fabric components. Up to sixteen Fibre Channel (SCSI-FCP and FICON host adapters) can be installed in any combination in a DS8880 Model 985/986. Up to thirty-two Fibre Channel (SCSI-FCP and FICON) host adapters can be installed in a DS8880 Model 985/986 system in any combination (16 in the DS8880 base unit and another 16 in the first DS8880 expansion unit). For DS8880 model 984 system can installed up to sixteen Fibre Channel (SCSI-FCP and FICON) in any combination (8 in the DS8880 base unit and another 8 in the first DS8880 expansion unit). The Fibre Channel adapters have four or eight ports. They are installed within I/O enclosures and can communicate with both processor complexes.
- Storage facility: A storage facility is composed of a storage server and two or more storage enclosures that are packaged in one or more racks with associated power supplies, batteries, and cooling.
- Storage server: A storage server is composed of two processor complexes, two or more I/O enclosures, and a pair of Rack Power Control (RPC) cards.
- Processor complex: A processor complex controls and manages the storage facility to perform the function of a storage server. The two processor complexes form a redundant pair and execute Licensed Machine Code (LMC) to manage and control the operations and licensed function of the DS8880. The processor complex also has Ethernet connections to allow management functions to be invoked over a network. The new DS8880 provides 6, 8, 16, and 24-core processor complex options within the same model.
Sub-components in a processor complex include:
- Processor: The processor complex contains one or more processors that share a common address space.
- Processor memory: The memory on a processor complex is used to store instructions and data for the processors or is used to store data that is transferred between processor complex memory and I/O adapters within the configuration. Some of the processor memory is used as Nonvolatile Storage (NVS) to store a second copy of write data to help protect against loss of data in the event of a processor or power failure. In addition, some of the processor memory is used for hardware caching to help improve the performance of the processor complex. The DS8884 (6-core) supports up to 256 GB of processor memory and the DS8886 (8-core) supports 128 GB and 256 GB of processor memory, the DS8886 (16-core) supports 256 GB and 512 GB of processor memory and the DS8886 (24-core) supports 1,024 GB and 2,048 GB of processor memory.
- I/O enclosures: An I/O enclosure provides a way to interconnect
one or more external I/O adapters to the processor complex I/O
interface. The I/O enclosure supports the following types of external
I/O adapters:
- Host adapters: A host adapter supports the attachment of host systems to the storage facility Device Adapters.
- Device Adapters: A device adapter supports the attachment of storage devices to the storage facility through one or more I/O ports. The attachment is a PCIe point to point connection in a DS8880 system. Each DS8884 Model 984 (6-core) system can have up to four device adapter pairs and each DS8886 Model 985/986 (8-core) system can have up to four device adapter pairs, and each DS8886 Model 985/986 (16-core or 24-core) system can have up to eight device adapter pairs.
- Storage enclosure: A storage enclosure provides a way to interconnect one or more external storage devices to the I/O interface attached to a device adapter I/O port. Each storage enclosure contains a redundant pair of storage enclosure services cards.
- Disk drives: The disk drives provide storage capacity for the
DS8880. Disk drives are installed in disk enclosure pairs, in a disk
install group of sixteen identical drives of the same type (capacity
and rpm).
The DS8880 offers a selection of disk drives, including Solid State Drives (SSD), nearline SAS drives, and SAS encrypting drives, allowing a DS8886 to scale up to 5 PB of capacity.
- Flash cards: The flash cards provide additional capacity and performance for the DS8880. Flash cards are installed in a High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair, in an install group of sixteen flash cards and can be intermixed
Size Drive type Drive Encryption RAID Field
speed drive support supported
------- ------------ -------- ---------- -------- ---------
400 GB Flash N/A Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
800 GB Flash N/A Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
1600 GB Flash N/A Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
3200 GB Flash N/A Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
400 GB SSD N/A Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
800 GB SSD N/A Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
1.6 TB SSD N/A Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
300 GB SAS 15K rpm Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
600 GB SAS 15K rpm Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
600 GB SAS 10K rpm Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
1.2 TB SAS 10K rpm Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
1.8 TB SAS 10K rpm Yes 5, 6, 10 Yes
4 TB SAS nearline 7.2K rpm Yes 6, 10 Yes
6 TB SAS nearline 7.2K rpm Yes 6, 10 Yes
Logical view
To servers, the DS8000 series appears to be a set of disk volumes that can be configured to emulate disk device types that are compatible with the attaching servers.
The storage capacity of the DS8000 series is logically divided into groups of eight physical media that are each configured as either a RAID-5, RAID 6 or RAID-10 array. RAID-6 will be defaulted RAID type for all the storage media. The array is logically formatted to support either:
- Count-key data (3380 or 3390 track format)
- Fixed-block data (either 512 or 520 byte logical blocks)
Once formatted, the arrays are then subdivided into allocable storage units that can be allocated to individual volumes or LUNs that can be assigned to the various attached servers.
The DS8880 logical configuration is created and managed using the IBM System Storage DS Storage Manager, IBM DS Command Line Interface (CLI), or IBM DS Open API and Graphical User Interface (GUI).
Physical specifications
- Width: 640 mm (25 in)
- Depth: 1,440 mm (56.5 in)
- Height: 40U: 1,939 mm (76 in)
- Weight: Model 984: 975.7 kg (2,151 lb)
Operating environment
- Temperature: 16°C to 32°C (60°F to 90°F)
- Relative humidity: 20% - 80%
- Wet bulb (caloric value):
- DS8886 Model 985/85E
- 22757 BTU for A rack
- 20912 BTU for B rack
- 17869 BTU for C or D rack
- 11913 BTU for E rack
- DS8886 Model 986/86E
- 20890 BTU for A rack
- 19610 BTU for B rack
- 16457 BTU for C or D or E rack
- DS8884
- 15806 BTU for A rack
- 14676 BTU for B rack
- 15947 BTU for C rack
- DS8886 Model 985/85E
- Electrical power:
- DS8886 Model 985/85E
- 6.4 KW for A rack
- 6.0 KW for B rack
- 5.1 KW for C or D rack
- 3.4 KW for E rack
- DS8886 Model 986/86E
- 5.9 KW for A rack
- 5.5 KW for B rack
- 4.6 KW for C or D or E rack
- DS8884
- 4.5 KW for A rack
- 4.2 KW for B rack
- 4.5 KW for C rack
- DS8886 Model 985/85E
- Capacity of exhaust:
- 1300 cubic feet/minute for 985/986
- 1500 cubic feet/minute for 85E/86E
- 1200 cubic meter/minute for 984
- 1100 cubic meter/minute for 84E
- Declared operating A-weighted sound power level: 7.9 bels
- Leakage current: 100 mA
Power consumption
- Model 984 (6-core) with 192 drives and 1 HPFE pair: 4.5 KW
- Model 84E with 240 drives and 1 HPFE pair: 4.2 KW
- Model 84E with 336 drives: 4.5 KW
- Model 985 (8, 16, and 24-core) with 144 drives and 2 HPFE pair: 6.4 KW
- Model 85E with 240 drives and 2 HPFE pair: 6.0 KW
- Model 85E with 432 drives: 5.1 KW
- Model 85E with 288 drives: 3.4 KW
- Model 986 (8, 16, and 24-core) with 96 drives and 2 HPFE pair: 5.9 KW
- Model 86E with 192 drives and 2 HPFE pair: 5.5 KW
- Model 86E with 384 drives: 4.6 KW
DASD Subsystems
- Product Category (2011 law): N
- Maximum physical storage capacity: 3,379,200 Gigabytes
- Power consumption: 26,000 watts
- DASD Energy Consumption Efficiency: 0.0077 watts/Gigabytes
Homologation
This product is not certified for connection to interfaces of public telecommunications networks in the following countries:
- Chad
- Eritrea
- Guinea-Bissau
- Haiti
- Macau (China)
- Moldavia
- Sri Lanka
This product is also restricted for use in the embargoed countries:
- Cuba
- Iran, Islamic Republic of
- North Korea
- Sudan
- Syria (Syrian Arab Republic)
Limitations
Not applicable.
Hardware requirements
Licensed Machine Code
All announced features and functions are supported on the IBM System Storage DS8000 series and require DS8000 LMC 8.8.20.xx.xx (bundle version 88.20.xxx.xx), or later.
Some DS8000 series features and functions may not be available or supported in all environments. Current information on supported environments, prerequisites, and minimum operating system levels is available at the IBM System Storage Interoperation Center.
Software requirements
Not applicable.
Back to top
Publications
The following publication has been updated to reflect this announcement and will be available November 2, 2016.
Title Order
number
------------------------------------------ ---------
IBM DS8880 Introduction and Planning Guide GC27-8525
The following publications are shipped with the DS8000 series:
Title Order
number
--------------------------------------------- -------
IBM DS8000 Customer Series Publications CDROM 01FT138
IBM DS8000 Series License Documentation CDROM 01FT139
The publications CD contains the following documents:
Title Order
number
-------------------------------------------------------------- ---------
License Agreement for Machine Code SC28-6872
IBM DS8880 Introduction and Planning Guide GC27-8525
IBM DS8000 Host Systems Attachment Guide SC27-8527
IBM DS Command-Line Interface User's Guide for DS8000 series SC27-8526
IBM System Storage Multipath Subsystem Device Driver User's GC52-1309
Guide
IBM DS Open Application Programming Interface Installation and GC27-4211
Reference
IBM DS8000 series Non-IBM_Licenses_and_Notices-Rel 5.x-7.x, GA32-2204
8.0, 8.1 , 8.2
IBM Warranty Information GC26-7919
READ ME FIRST for IBM Products GA32-1061
IBM System Storage Notice Regarding Storage Encryption 45W6389
The license CD contains the following documentation:
Title Order
number
-------------------------------------------------------------- ---------
IBM System Storage DS Storage Mgr R8.2 & CIM Agent for DS Open GC27-3907
Application Programming Interface 5.8.2
IBM International License Agreement for Non-Warranted Programs 98Y2827
(ILAN)
Global Mirroring Utilities for ICKDSF Users and Open Systems GC26-7644
Environments License Information
DS8000 publications are available at the IBM Publications Center.
You can search, view, and collaborate with documentation using IBM Knowledge Center. IBM Knowledge Center is an IBM-wide view of technical information with multiple sources of offerings in a single location.
IBM Knowledge Center provides a centralized and consolidated way to access the information you need to use IBM products and also provides innovative ways to find information and to create your own set of information to cater to your needs. You will be able to personalize views, build customer documents, and interact with other information.
To access the IBM Publications Center Portal, go to the IBM Publications Center website.
The Publications Center is a worldwide central repository for IBM product publications and marketing material with a catalog of 70,000 items. Extensive search facilities are provided. A large number of publications are available online in various file formats, which can currently be downloaded.
Back to top
Features
|
Features - No charge | |
Feature descriptions |
|
Features - Chargeable | ||
Features - No charge
Description Machine Models Feature
type numbers
-------------------------------------- ------- ----------------- -------
Model 8xE merge indicators:
- 8xE factory merge 2834 984, 985, 986, 0003
84E, 85E, 86E
- 8xE field merge 2834 84E, 85E, 86E 0004
- PPA Software Order Indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0017
84E, 85E, 86E
- DoD indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0020
84E, 85E, 86E
- JEMT indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0021
84E, 85E, 86E
- Single phase 200-220V, 30A 2834 985, 85E 0101
- Single phase 220-240V, 30A 2834 985, 85E 0102
- Cables indicator 2834 85E, 86E 0110
- Shipping weight reduction 2834 984, 985, 986, 0200
84E, 85E, 86E
Model 8xF position indicators:
- 98x - 8xE position 1 2834 984, 985, 986, 0241
84E, 85E, 86E
- 98x - 8xE position 2 2834 984, 985, 986, 0242
84E, 85E, 86E
- 98x - 8xE position 3 2834 985, 986, 85E, 0243
86E
- 98x - 8xE position 4 2834 985, 986, 85E, 0244
86E
Encryption not capable 2834 984, 985, 986 0403
TDCPP free indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0404
84E, 85E, 86E
All-flash indicator 2834 984, 985, 986 0600
SAS-SSD mix indicators 2834 984, 985, 986, 0603
84E, 85E, 86E
SSD custom placement indicators 2834 984, 985, 986, 0604
84E, 85E, 86E
Flash card sets custom placement 2834 985, 986, 85E, 0606
indicator 86E
Safe Guarded Copy Indicator 2834 984, 985, 986 0785
Initial system capacity:
- Up to 5 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0795
84E, 85E, 86E
- 5.1 TB to 10 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0796
84E, 85E, 86E
- 10.1 TB to 25 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0797
84E, 85E, 86E
- 25.1 TB to 50 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0798
84E, 85E, 86E
- 50.1 TB to 75 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0799
84E, 85E, 86E
- 75.1 TB to 100 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0801
84E, 85E, 86E
- 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0803
84E, 85E, 86E
- 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0804
84E, 85E, 86E
- 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0806
84E, 85E, 86E
- 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0807
84E, 85E, 86E
- 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0808
84E, 85E, 86E
- 6000.1 TB to 12000 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986, 0809
84E, 85E, 86E
Attachment indicators:
- IBM/Openwave Alliance indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0930
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM System i indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0931
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM System p indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0932
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM System x indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0933
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM System z indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0934
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM System z B/C indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0935
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM System zEnterprise Cloud 2834 984, 985, 986, 0936
indicator 84E, 85E, 86E
- Linux indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0940
84E, 85E, 86E
- Storage Appliance indicator 2834 984, 985, 986 0952
- IBM ProtecTIER indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0960
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM Storwize V7000 indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0961
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM N series indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0962
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM SAN Volume Controller indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0963
84E, 85E, 86E
- IBM/EPIC attachment indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0964
84E, 85E, 86E
- VMware VAAI indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0965
84E, 85E, 86E
- OpenStack indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0966
84E, 85E, 86E
- US TAA compliance indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 0983
84E, 85E, 86E
Disk drive enclosures:
- HD disk enclosure pair 2834 984, 985, 986, 1241
84E, 85E, 86E
- HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 1245
84E, 85E, 86E
- HD 800 GB SSD enclosure indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 1256
84E, 85E, 86E
- HD1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 1257
84E, 85E, 86E
- DS8000 LMC R8.2 indicator 2834 84E, 85E, 86E 1982
- DS8000 LMC R8.3 indicator 2834 84E, 85E, 86E 1983
- DS8000 LMC R8.4 indicator 2834 84E, 85E, 86E 1984
- DS8000 LMC R8.5 indicator 2834 84E, 85E, 86E 1985
Processor license indicators:
- 6-core processor indicator 2834 984 4421
Function Authorization indicators
Base Function (BF):
- BF - Up to 100 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8151
- BF - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8152
- BF - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8153
- BF - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8154
- BF - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8155
- BF - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8156
- BF - 6000.1 TB to 12000 TB 2834 984, 985, 986 8160
Copy Services (CS) license:
- CS - Inactive 2834 984, 985, 986 8250
- CS - Up to 100 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8251
- CS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8252
- CS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8253
- CS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8254
- CS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8255
- CS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8256
- CS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB 2834 984, 985, 986 8260
z-synergy Services (zsS) license:
- zsS - Active 2834 984, 985, 986 8300
- zsS - Inactive 2834 984, 985, 986 8350
- zsS - Up to 100 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8351
- zsS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8352
- zsS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8353
- zsS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8354
- zsS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8355
- zsS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8356
- zsS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB 2834 984, 985, 986 8360
Copy Services Manager (CSM on HMC)
license:
- CSM on HMC - Inactive 2834 984, 985, 986 8450
- CSM on HMC - Up to 100 TB capacity 2834 984, 985, 986 8451
- CSM on HMC - 100.1 TB to 250 TB 2834 984, 985, 986 8452
capacity
- CSM on HMC - 250.1 TB to 500 TB 2834 984, 985, 986 8453
capacity
- CSM on HMC - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB 2834 984, 985, 986 8454
capacity
- CSM on HMC - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB 2834 984, 985, 986 8455
capacity
- CSM on HMC - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB 2834 984, 985, 986 8456
capacity
- CSM on HMC - 6000.1 TB to 100,000 TB 2834 984, 985, 986 8460
IGF transaction:
- IGF transaction indicator 2834 984, 985, 986 8999
Certified Pre-Owned Indicator 2834 984, 985, 986, 9994
84E, 85E, 86E
Shipping and Handling NC 2834 984, 985, 986, AG00
84E, 85E, 86E
Features - Chargeable
Description Machine Models Feature
type numbers
--------------------------- ------- ---------------------------- -------
Custom features:
- Top Expansion 2834 985, 986, 85E, 86E 0170
Front & rear door lock kit 2834 984, 985, 986, 1014
84E, 85E, 86E
Power:
- Single phase DC-UPS 2834 984, 985, 84E, 85E 1050
- Three phase DC-UPS 2834 986, 86E 1052
- Extended PLD 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1055
Single phase line cords:
- SPP cord, 200-240V, 60A, 2834 984, 985 84E, 85E 1062
3-pin connector
- SPP cord, 200-240V, 63A, 2834 984, 985 84E, 85E 1063
no connector
Three phase line cords:
- Three phase power cord, 2834 986, 86E 1086
380-415V, 30A, 5 pin
connector
- Three phase power cord, 2834 986, 86E 1087
200-240V, 30A, 4 pin
connector
- Three phase power cord, 2834 986, 86E 1088
380-415V, 40A, no connector
- Three phase power cord, 2834 986, 86E 1089
200-240V, 60A, 4 pin
connector
Special tool:
- Overhead ladder - 5ft 2834 984, 985, 986 1101
- Ladder - Top Expansion - 2834 985, 986 1102
3ft
- Kick Step 2834 984, 985, 986 1103
Management Console:
- Mgmt console - Primary 2834 984, 985, 986 1140
- Management console -
Primary v2 2834 984, 985, 986 1141
- Mgmt console - Secondary 2834 984, 985, 986 1150
- Management console -
Secondary v2 2834 984, 985, 986 1151
Disk drive enclosures:
- HD STD enclosure 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1242
indicator
- 3.5-inch disk enclosure 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1244
indicator
Disk drive cables:
- Disk drive cable group A 2834 985, 986 1246
- Disk drive cable group B 2834 85E, 86E 1247
- Disk drive cable group C 2834 85E, 86E 1248
- Disk drive cable group D 2834 85E, 86E 1249
- Disk drive cable group E 2834 85E, 86E 1251
- Extended HD disk drive 2834 85E, 86E 1252
cable group C
- Extended HD disk drive 2834 85E, 86E 1253
cable group D
- Extended HD disk drive 2834 85E, 86E 1254
cable group E
- BC Disk drive cable group 2834 984 1261
A
- BC Disk drive cable group 2834 84E 1262
B
- BC Disk drive cable group 2834 84E 1263
C
- Extended BC disk drive 2834 84E 1266
cable group C
I/O enclosure pair PCIe 3 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1303
I/O cables:
- PCI-E cable group 1 2834 985, 986 1320
- PCI-E cable group 2 2834 985, 986 1321
Top exit bracket:
- Top exit bracket for 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1400
Fibre cable
Fibre Channel/FICON cables:
- 50 um Fibre cable (LC) 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1410
- 50 um Fibre cable (LC/SC) 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1411
- 50 um Fibre cable 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1412
(Jumper)
- 9 um Fibre cable (LC) 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1420
- 9 um Fibre cable (LC/SC) 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1421
- 9 um Fibre cable (Jumper) 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1422
- 40m zHyperlink 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1450
cable
- 150m zHyperlink 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1451
cable
High Performance Flash
Enclosure Gen2 family:
- High Performance Flash 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1600
Enclosure Gen2 pair
- 400 GB 2.5-inch flash 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1610
card set
- 800 GB 2.5-inch flash 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1611
card set
- 1600 GB 2.5-inch flash 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1612
card set
- 3200 GB 2.5-inch flash 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1613
card set
- 1.92 TB 2.5-inch high
capacity flash 2834 984, 84E 1622
- 3.8 TB 2.5-inch high
capacity flash 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1623
- 7.68 TB 2.5-inch high
capacity flash 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1624
- 15.36 TB 2.5-inch high
capacity flash 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1625
- Flash enclosure filler 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1699
set
DS8000 Licensed Machine
Code:
- DS8000 LMC R8.2 2834 984, 985, 986 1882
- DS8000 LMC R8.3 2834 984, 985, 986 1883
- DS8000 LMC R8.4 2834 984, 985, 986 1884
- DS8000 LMC R8.5 2834 984, 985, 986 1885
Earthquake kit 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1906
Hardware installation MES 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 1999
Disk enclosure filler sets:
- 3.5-inch disk enclosure 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 2997
filler set
- 2.5-inch disk enclosure 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 2999
filler set
Device adapters:
- Device adapter pair I 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 3053
Host adapters:
- 8 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 3153
adapter PCIe
- 8 Gb 8 port SW FCP/FICON 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 3157
adapter PCIe
- 8 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 3253
adapter PCIe
- 8 Gb 8 port LW FCP/FICON 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 3257
adapter PCIe
- 16 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 3353
adapter PCIE
- 16 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 3453
adapter PCIE
- zHyperlink 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 3500
adapter
- Transparent cloud
tiering 10Gb/1Gb 2834 984 3600
ethernet pair for 2U controllers
- Transparent cloud
tiering 10Gb/1Gb 2834 985, 986 3601
ethernet pair for 4U controllers
Processor memory:
- 64GB PROCESSOR MEMORY 2834 984 4223
6COR
- 128GB PROCESSOR MEMORY 2834 984 4224
6CO
- 256GB PROCESSOR MEMORY 2834 984 4225
6CO
- 64 GB processor memory 2834 984 4233
- 128 GB processor memory 2834 984 4234
- 256 GB processor memory 2834 984 4235
- 128 GB Processor memory 2834 985, 986 4324
(8-core only)
- 256 GB Processor memory 2834 985, 986 4325
(8-core or 16-core)
- 512 GB Processor memory 2834 985, 986 4326
(16-core only)
- 1 TB Processor memory 2834 985, 986 4327
(24-core only)
- 2 TB Processor memory 2834 985, 986 4328
(24-core only)
- 128 GB processor memory
(8-core only) 2834 985, 986 4334
- 256 GB processor memory
(8-core only 2834 985, 986 4335
or 16-core)
- 512 GB processor memory
(16-core only) 2834 985, 986 4336
- 1,024 GB Processor memory
(24-core 2834 985, 986 4337
only)
- 2,048 GB Processor memory
(24-core 2834 985, 986 4338
only)
Processor license
indicators:
- 8-core processor 2834 985, 986 4422
indicator
- 16-core processor 2834 985, 986 4423
indicator
- 24-core processor 2834 985, 986 4424
indicator
- 6 to 12 Core processor
upgrade 2834 984 4425
Encryption disk drive sets:
- 300 GB 15K drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 5308
- 600 GB 15K drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 5618
- 600 GB 10K drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 5708
- 1.2 TB 10K drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 5768
- 1.8 TB 10K drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 5778
- 4 TB 7.2K half drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 5868
-6 TB 7.2K half drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 5878
Encryption SSD drive sets:
- 400 GB SSD drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 6158
- 800 GB SSD drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 6258
- 1.6 TB SSD drive set 2834 984, 985, 986, 84E, 85E, 86E 6358
Shipping and handling 984 2834 984 AGAA
Shipping and handling 84E 2834 84E AGAB
Shipping and handling 985 2834 985 AGAC
Shipping and handling 85E 2834 85E AGAD
Shipping and handling 986 2834 986 AGAE
Shipping and handling 86E 2834 86E AGAF
Feature descriptions
Note: Not all of the following features are available in all countries. Check with your country representative for specific feature availability.
No charge features for Model 984
(#000x) Model 8xE merge indicators
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description Corequisite ------- ----------------- ------------- 0003 8xE factory merge Feature #038x
This feature indicates an expansion unit model is being ordered with the initial order of the base unit model, and notifies Manufacturing that a factory merge of the base unit and expansion unit is required. This feature is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0017)
This feature indicates the customer (enterprise) does not have a CSM on HMC software license and a license will be ordered using Passport Advantage.
Software order indicator feature 0017 (along with feature 84xx) must be specified on the machine type 283x ordered for a given customer.
This feature is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Comments:
- CSM PA order number has to be input before 84xx feature code can be selected
- CSM has to be ordered through Passport Advantage before feature code #0017 can be selected
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0020) DoD indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------- 0020 DoD indicator
This feature provides a special label required for Department of Defense orders.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0021) JEMT indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature is used to indicate an IBM internal order for machine under the Joint Engineering Manufacturing Test (JEMT) program. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0200) Shipping weight reduction
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature ensures the maximum shipping weight of the machine does not exceed 909 kg (2,000 lb) during the initial shipment.
The machine weight is reduced by removing selected components, which will be shipped separately. The components are installed into the machine by the IBM service representative during the machine installation. This feature will increase the machine installation time and should only be ordered if required.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#024x) Model 8xE position indicators
Feature Description System-level corequisites ------- -------------------- ---------------------------- 0241 98x - 8xE position 1 Model 984 with feature #0241 0242 98x - 8xE position 2 Model 984 with feature #0242
These features indicate the presence of an attached Model 8xE expansion unit. They are used to determine multi-model system configuration rules, including cross-model feature corequisites.
Incorrect use of this feature can result in the creation and shipment of incorrect and/or incomplete configurations. Therefore, it must be added or removed if changes are made to the system-level configuration.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: Feature #0241 and #0242 are not supported if feature #4223 is ordered
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0403) Encryption not capable
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
The government agency for the People's Republic of China and Russia have new encryption compliance requirements on products sold into China and Russia. This feature ensures the non-encryption certification key is produced for China and Russia shipments to comply with the requirements.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0404) - TDCPP free indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This indicator acts as a safety value to insure any assembly/PNs being shipped is TDCPP free. It is only required if the unit is going to be shipped to a jurisdiction that requires the removal of TDCPP from components.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 1)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#0600) All-flash indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------------- 0600 All-flash indicator
This feature indicates that the machine will be configured with flash drives (features #6xxx) only. The maximum number of flash drives supported for this configuration will follow the rules of the existing flash drives (features #6xxx). It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0603) SAS-SSD mix indicator
This feature indicates that the machine will be configured with solid state drives (features #6xxx) and SAS disk drives (#5xx8) within a storage enclosure. Development will provide a document to manufacturing where to place the drive sets. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature will remove enclosure indicator features #1242, #1245, and #125x from the configuration to avoid any confusion and errors on the configuration output file.
A SCORE RPQ will be required and the RPQ team will provide a password to validate the configuration.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #0603 requires feature #0604 to be selected
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#0604) SSD custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0604 SSD custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select
additional SSD enclosure indicators (feature #1245, or #125x)
allowing the SSD's to be spread over additional DA pairs to optimize
performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system
will allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive
enclosures first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the
enclosure is allowed.
The number of SSD indicators cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of enclosure indicators cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
Assuming no HDDs, for example, where a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the normal quantity of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator) is two. This will result in two sets of SSDs being installed in the first enclosure pair and two sets of SSDs being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two DA pairs.
Alternatively, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of four of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator). This would result in a set of SSDs being installed in each of the four enclosure pairs, spread across four DA pairs.
Additionally, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of three of feature #1245. This would result in the installation of two sets of SSDs in the first enclosure pair, a set of SSDs in the second enclosure pair, and a set of SSDs in the third enclosure pair, spread across three DA pairs.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0785) - Safe Guarded Copy Indicator
This feature indicates that the product uses Safe Guard Copy (SGC) functionallity.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 1)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Both
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#0795-#08xx) Initial system capacity
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0795 Up to 5 TB capacity 0796 5.1 TB to 10 TB capacity 0797 10.1 TB to 25 TB capacity 0798 25.1 TB to 50 TB capacity 0799 50.1 TB to 75 TB capacity 0801 75.1 TB to 100 TB capacity 0803 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 0804 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 0806 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 0807 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 0808 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 0809 6000.1 TB or 12000 TB capacity
These features indicate the total capacity of a system (base unit and any attached expansion unit models) at initial order. They are for administrative purposes only.
To determine the total capacity, perform the following calculation:
- Determine the total number of #5xx8 and #6xxx disk drive features on the order for each disk drive capacity (each quantity represents 16 drives for #5xx8 except #58x8 represents 8 drives) and the total number of #16xx flash card features on the order for each flash card capacity (each quantity represents 16 cards for #16xx)
- Multiply each total by its respective disk drive capacity (i.e., 300 GB, 400 GB, 600 GB, 800 GB, 1.2 TB, 1.6 TB, 1.8TB, 3.2TB, 4 TB or 6TB)
- Add together all the resulting values
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0930) IBM/Openwave alliance indicator
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/Openwave strategic alliance. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0931 - #0936) IBM attachment indicators
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 0931 IBM System i indicator 0932 IBM System p indicator 0933 IBM System x indicator 0934 IBM System z indicator 0935 IBM System z B/C indicator 0936 IBM System zEnterprise Cloud indicator
These features indicate the IBM System Server environments in which the machine will be used. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
All applicable features should be specified.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One per feature number
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0940) Linux indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a Linux environment (that is, it will be attached to servers running the Linux operating system). It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0952) Storage Appliance indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used with model AP1 (that is, it will be attached to appliances running SKLM or CSM). It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0960 - #0963) IBM storage indicators
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------- 0960 IBM ProtecTIER indicator 0961 IBM Storwize V7000 indicator 0962 IBM N series indicator 0963 IBM SAN Volume Controller indicator
These features indicate the machine will be attached with other IBM System Storage configurations. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0964) IBM/EPIC indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------------------- 0964 IBM/EPIC indicator (for EPIC software environment)
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/EPIC software environment. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0965) VMware VAAI indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a VMware VAAI support environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0966) OpenStack indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used with OpenStack SW driver support Cloud environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0983) US TAA compliance indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature is for the US Government customers and customers ordering on behalf of the US Government. When used, it provides the DS8000 as a TAA compliant system. It should not be used except where bids or customers require TAA compliance and orders with this feature number will be reviewed for relevance. The maximum order quantity for this feature is one and is for initial plant order only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None, but a post-configuration/order review will be made to ensure TAA compliance is required
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#12x1) HD disk enclosure pair
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1241 HD disk enclosure pair
This feature indicates the total number of disk enclosures pair. A disk enclosure pair supports up to 48 disk drives (2.5-inch disk) or 24 disk drives (3.5-inch disk).
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either 16, 32, or 48 disk drives (features #5xx8 and/or #6xx8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 16 or 32 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1245, #125x, and #1244.
- Minimum required: None if feature #1600 is present in the configuration and one if feature #1600 is not present in the configuration
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: Each #1241 feature requires one feature #1242, #1244, #1245, or #125x. The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1244, #1245, and #125x.
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- #5xx8 and #6xx8 features can be installed within the same disk enclosure pair as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Only #58x8 features can be installed within the 3.5-inch disk enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#12xx) SSD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1245 HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1256 HD 800 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1257 HD 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicator
The number of 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicators are based on the number of SSD capacity drive types selected by the user and each enclosure indicator indicates up to three sets of SSD drives of the same capacity type.
This feature notifies manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 400, 800, and 1,600 GB SSD drives. It is for administrative purposes only.
User have the options to spread the SSD drives on individual SSD enclosure or installed up to three SSD drive sets on one SSD enclosure.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: Each feature #1245 requires a minimum of one #6158 feature. Each feature #1256 requires a minimum of one #6258 feature. Each feature #1257 requires a minimum of one #6358 feature.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#8xxx) Function Authorization indicators
(#8450, #8452-6, #8460)
(No Longer Available as of June 16, 2017)
Feature Description IBM 2839 corequisite
------- ---------------------------------------- -----------------------
8151 BF - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8151
8152 BF - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8152
8153 BF - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8153
8154 BF - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8154
8155 BF - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8155
8156 BF - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8156
8160 BF - 6000.1 TB to 12000 TB Model LF8 feature #8160
8250 CS - Inactive Model LF8 feature #8250
8251 CS - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8251
8252 CS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8252
8253 CS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8253
8254 CS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8254
8255 CS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8255
8256 CS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8256
8260 CS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB Model LF8 feature #8260
8300 zsS - Active Model LF8 feature #8300
8350 zsS - Inactive Model LF8 feature #8350
8351 zsS - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8351
8352 zsS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8352
8353 zsS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8353
8354 zsS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8354
8355 zsS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8355
8356 zsS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8356
8360 zsS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB Model LF8 feature #8360
8450 CSM on HMC - Inactive Model LF8 feature #8450
8451 CSM on HMC - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8451
8452 CSM on HMC - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8452
8453 CSM on HMC - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8453
8454 CSM on HMC - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB Model LF8 feature #8454
capacity
8455 CSM on HMC - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB Model LF8 feature #8455
capacity
8456 CSM on HMC - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB Model LF8 feature #8456
capacity
8460 CSM on HMC - 6000.1 TB to 100,000 TB Model LF8 feature #8460
For Copy Services Manager on HMC's entitlement, order on IBM Copy Services Manager 6.x.x (5725-Z54) is required before you can configure Copy Services Manager on HMC on MT283x on the required capacity. Ensure the number of years for software support and maintenance is purchased is tied to the warranty of the MT283x.
These features enable a licensed function subject to the client applying a feature activation code made available by IBM. They are also used for maintenance billing purposes.
DS8000 Series Function Authorization (machine type 2839) feature numbers must be purchased to establish the extent of IBM authorization for the licensed function before the feature activation code is provided by IBM.
As 2839 Function Authorization #8xxx features are ordered (plant and field install), the same #8xxx features (in the same quantity) must also be ordered against the 2834 machine.
- Minimum required: At least one of the #8151 - #8160 features
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature #8x50: One
- Feature #8300: One
- Feature #8x51: 10 (each quantity represent per 10 TB)
- Features #8x52 : 10 (each quantity represent per 15 TB)
- Features #8x53 : 10 (each quantity represent per 25 TB)
- Features #8x54 : 10 (each quantity represent per 75 TB)
- Features #8x55 : 10 (each quantity represent per 175 TB)
- Features #8x56 : 10 (each quantity represent per 300 TB)
- Features #8x60 : 12 (188 for feature #8460) (each quantity represent per 500 TB)
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: Feature codes #8300 and #8350 cannot co-exist
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#8999) IGF transaction indicator
This feature is used to designate that a new 2834 machine is involved in an IGF transaction (lease or financing). It is for administrative purposes only.
When a new 2834 machine is involved in an IGF transaction, this feature must be ordered as a Record Purposes Only (RPO) MES. The RPO MES order must be placed using AAS or WTAAS; it cannot be ordered using e-config.
This feature is field-install only and cannot be included on the 2834 initial order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#9994) Certified Pre-Owned Indicator
This feature indicates an order for a refurbished machine under the terms of the Certified Pre-Owned offering. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#AG00) Shipping and Handling - No charge
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates Model 984 will have no shipping and handling charge added to the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
No charge features for Model 84E
(#000x) Model 8xE merge indicators
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ----------------- 0003 8xE factory merge 0004 8xE field merge
These features notify Manufacturing on whether the expansion unit model is subject to a factory merge or field merge with the base unit model. This feature is for administrative purposes only.
Feature #0003 is required if the expansion unit model is being ordered with the initial order of the base unit model. It notifies Manufacturing that a factory merge of the base unit and expansion unit is required.
Feature #0004 is required if the expansion unit model is being ordered for an installed base unit model. It notifies Manufacturing that a field merge of the base unit and expansion unit is required.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0017)
This feature indicates the customer (enterprise) does not have a CSM on HMC software license and a license will be ordered using Passport Advantage.
Software order indicator feature 0017 (along with feature 84xx) must be specified on the machine type 283x ordered for a given customer.
This feature is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Comments:
- CSM PA order number has to be input before 84xx feature code can be selected
- CSM has to be ordered through Passport Advantage before feature code #0017 can be selected
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0020) DoD indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------- 0020 DoD indicator
This feature provides a special label required for Department of Defense orders.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0021) JEMT indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature is used to indicate an IBM internal order for machine under the Joint Engineering Manufacturing Test (JEMT) program. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0200) Shipping weight reduction
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature ensures the maximum shipping weight of the machine does not exceed 909 kg (2,000 lb.) during the initial shipment.
The machine weight is reduced by removing selected components, which will be shipped separately. The components are installed into the machine by the IBM service representative during the machine installation. This feature will increase the machine installation time and should only be ordered if required.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#024x) Model 8xE position indicators
Feature Description System-level corequisites ------- -------------------- ---------------------------- 0241 98x - 8xE position 1 Model 84E with feature #0241 0242 98x - 8xE position 2 Model 84E with feature #0242
These features indicate the base unit model number and the physical position of the expansion unit model relative to the base enclosure. They are used to determine multi-model system configuration rules, including cross-model feature corequisites.
Incorrect use of this feature can result in the creation and shipment of incorrect and/or incomplete configurations. Therefore, it must be added or removed if changes are made to the system-level configuration.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: Feature #0241 and #0242 are not supported if feature #4223 is ordered
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0404) - TDCPP free indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This indicator acts as a safety value to insure any assembly/PNs being shipped is TDCPP free. It is only required if the unit is going to be shipped to a jurisdiction that requires the removal of TDCPP from components.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 1)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#0603) SAS-SSD mix indicator
This feature indicates that the machine will be configured with solid state drives (features #6xxx) and SAS disk drives (#5xx8) within a storage enclosure. Development will provide a document to manufacturing where to place the drive sets. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature will remove enclosure indicator features #1242, #1245, and #125x from the configuration to avoid any confusion and errors on the configuration output file.
A SCORE RPQ will be required and the RPQ team will provide a password to validate the configuration.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #0603 requires feature #0604 to be selected
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#0604) SSD custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0604 SSD custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select
additional SSD enclosure indicators (feature #1245, or #125x)
allowing the SSD's to be spread over additional DA pairs to optimize
performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system
will allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive
enclosures first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the
enclosure is allowed.
The number of SSD indicators cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of enclosure indicators cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
Assuming no HDDs, for example, where a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the normal quantity of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator) is two. This will result in two sets of SSDs being installed in the first enclosure pair and two sets of SSDs being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two DA pairs.
Alternatively, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of four of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator). This would result in a set of SSDs being installed in each of the four enclosure pairs, spread across four DA pairs.
Additionally, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of three of feature #1245. This would result in the installation of two sets of SSDs in the first enclosure pair, a set of SSDs in the second enclosure pair, and a set of SSDs in the third enclosure pair, spread across three DA pairs.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0795-#08xx) Initial system capacity
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0795 Up to 5 TB capacity 0796 5.1 TB to 10 TB capacity 0797 10.1 TB to 25 TB capacity 0798 25.1 TB to 50 TB capacity 0799 50.1 TB to 75 TB capacity 0801 75.1 TB to 100 TB capacity 0803 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 0804 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 0806 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 0807 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 0808 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 0809 6000.1 TB or 12000 TB capacity
These features indicate the total capacity of a system (base unit and any attached expansion unit models) at initial order. They are for administrative purposes only.
To determine the total capacity, perform the following calculation:
- Determine the total number of #5xx8 and #6xxx disk drive features on the order for each disk drive capacity (each quantity represents 16 drives for #5xx8 except #58x8 represents 8 drives) and the total number of #16xx flash card features on the order for each flash card capacity (each quantity represents 16 cards for #16xx)
- Multiply each total by its respective disk drive capacity (i.e., 300 GB, 400 GB, 600 GB, 800 GB, 1.2 TB, 1.6 TB, 1.8TB, 3.2TB, 4 TB, or 6TB)
- Add together all the resulting values
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0930) IBM/Openwave alliance indicator
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/Openwave strategic alliance. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0931 - #0936) IBM attachment indicators
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 0931 IBM System i indicator 0932 IBM System p indicator 0933 IBM System x indicator 0934 IBM System z indicator 0935 IBM System z B/C indicator 0936 IBM System zEnterprise Cloud indicator
These features indicate the IBM System Server environments in which the machine will be used. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One per feature number
- Corequisites: When specified, a feature should be added to all models within the system (e.g., base unit model and all attached expansion unit models) and the 2839 Function Authorization model and features associated with the machine.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0940) Linux indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a Linux environment (that is, it will be attached to servers running the Linux operating system). It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0960 - #0963) IBM storage indicators
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------- 0960 IBM ProtecTIER indicator 0961 IBM Storwize V7000 indicator 0962 IBM N series indicator 0963 IBM SAN Volume Controller indicator
These features indicate the machine will be attached with other IBM System Storage configurations. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0964) IBM/EPIC indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------------------- 0964 IBM/EPIC indicator (for EPIC software environment)
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/EPIC software environment. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0965) VMware VAAI indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a VMware VAAI support environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0966) OpenStack indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used with OpenStack SW driver support Cloud environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0983) US TAA compliance indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature is for the US Government customers and customers ordering on behalf of the US Government. When used, it provides the DS8000 as a TAA compliant system. It should not be used except where bids or customers require TAA compliance and orders with this feature number will be reviewed for relevance. The maximum order quantity for this feature is one and is for initial plant order only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None, but a post-configuration/order review will be made to ensure TAA compliance is required
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#12x1) HD disk enclosure pair
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1241 HD disk enclosure pair
This feature indicates the total number of disk enclosures pair. The HD disk enclosure pair supports up to 48 disk drives. (2.5-inch disk) or 24 disk drives (3.5-inch disk).
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either 16, 32, or 48 disk drives (features #5xx8 and/or #6xx8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 16 or 32 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1244, #1245, and #125x.
Refer to the table below to determine the required quantity of feature #1241.
Model 84E Model 84E - Model - #0242 #0241 Disk 984 - Disk enclosure required enclosure pair #1241 #1241 pair quantity minimum quantity quantity --------- ----------- -------- 1 5 (min qty) -
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Five are allowed if feature #0241 is ordered. Seven are allowed if #0242 is ordered
- Corequisites:
- Each #12x1 feature requires one of features #5xxx or #6xxx
- One of these features must be #5xx8 or #6xx8
- Each #1241 feature requires one of feature #1242, #1244, #1245, or #125x
- The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1244, #1245, and #125x
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity and speed). If the disk enclosure pair is populated with 16 drives of a withdrawn type, a drive of the same capacity but a higher speed may be installed.
- #5xx8 and #6xx8 features can be installed within the same disk enclosure pair as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed).
- Only #58x8 features can be installed within the 3.5-inch disk enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#12xx) SSD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1245 HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1256 HD 800 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1257 HD1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicator
The number of 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicators are based on the number of SSD capacity drive types selected by the user and each enclosure indicator indicates up to three sets of SSD drives of the same capacity type.
This feature notifies manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 400, 800, and 1,600 GB SSD drives. It is for administrative purposes only.
User have the options to spread the SSD drives on individual SSD enclosure or installed up to three SSD drive sets on one SSD enclosure.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Five if feature #0241 exists and Seven if feature #0242 exists
- Corequisites: Each feature #1245 requires a minimum of one #6158 feature. Each feature #1256 requires a minimum of one #6258 feature. Each feature #1257 requires a minimum of one #6358 feature.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#198x) DS8000 LMC R8.x indicator
(#1982) DS8000 LMC R8.2 indicator
(No longer available as of November 21, 2018)
(#1983) DS8000 LMC R8.3 indicator
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
(#1984) DS8000 LMC R8.4 indicator
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
Feature Description System-level corequisite
------- ----------------------- --------------------------
1982 DS8000 LMC R8.2 #1882 feature on Model 984
indicator
1983 DS8000 LMC R8.3 #1883 feature on Model 984
indicator
1984 DS8000 LMC R8.4 #1884 feature on Model 984
indicator
1985 DS8000 LMC R8.5 #1885 feature on Model 984
indicator
This feature provides DS8000 Licensed Machine Code (LMC) R8.x corresponding to the appropriate bundle family. It is used as an indicator on the LMC versions loaded on the base model and allows manufacturing to build the appropriate drive types for the expansion frame.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Limitations: None
- Plant install/field install:
- For feature #1982, #1983: Field only
- For feature #1984, #1985: Both
(#9994) Certified Pre-Owned Indicator
This feature indicates an order for a refurbished machine under the terms of the Certified Pre-Owned offering. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#AG00) Shipping and Handling - No charge
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates Model 84E will have no shipping and handling charge added to the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
No charge features for Model 985
(#000x) Model 8xE merge indicators
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description Corequisite ------- ----------------- ------------- 0003 8xE factory merge Feature #024x
This feature indicates an expansion unit model is being ordered with the initial order of the base unit model, and notifies Manufacturing that a factory merge of the base unit and expansion unit is required. This feature is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0017)
This feature indicates the customer (enterprise) does not have a CSM on HMC software license and a license will be ordered using Passport Advantage.
Software order indicator feature 0017 (along with feature 84xx) must be specified on the machine type 283x ordered for a given customer.
This feature is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Comments:
- CSM PA order number has to be input before 84xx feature code can be selected
- CSM has to be ordered through Passport Advantage before feature code #0017 can be selected
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0020) DoD indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------- 0020 DoD indicator
This feature provides a special label required for Department of Defense orders.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0021) JEMT indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature is used to indicate an IBM internal order for machine under the Joint Engineering Manufacturing Test (JEMT) program. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#01xx) Input power indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- -------------------------- 0101 Single phase 200-220V, 30A 0102 Single phase 220-240V, 30A
This feature indicates how many HDD/SSD drive sets, flash enclosure pair, and host adapter cards can be supported on the base model. This feature is for administrative purposes only.
1 count = 3 HDD/SSD drive sets, 1 Flash enclosure pair, 8 Host adapter cards.
Total count (<=5) = HDD or SSD drive sets + # Flash enclosure pair
Total count (<=5) = HDD or SSD drive sets + # Flash enclosure pair + #Host Adapter card if feature #0101 is selected. Total count (<=6) + #Host Adapter card if feature #0101 is selected. Total count (<=6) = HDD or SSD drive set + # Flash enclosure pair + #Host Adapter card if feature #0102 is selected.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Either RPQ8S1479 or 8S1481 must be selected
- Limitations: Only for 8-core (#4422) or 16-core (#4423)
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0200) Shipping weight reduction
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature ensures the maximum shipping weight of the machine does not exceed 909 kg (2,000 lb) during the initial shipment.
The machine weight is reduced by removing selected components, which will be shipped separately. The components are installed into the machine by the IBM service representative during the machine installation. This feature will increase the machine installation time and should only be ordered if required.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#024x) Model 8xE position indicators
Feature Description System-level corequisites ------- -------------------- ---------------------------- 0241 98x - 8xE position 1 Model 985 with feature #0241 0242 98x - 8xE position 2 Model 985 with feature #0242 0243 98x - 8xE position 3 Model 985 with feature #0243 0244 98x - 8xE position 4 Model 985 with feature #0244
These features indicate the presence of an attached Model 8xE expansion unit. They are used to determine multi-model system configuration rules, including cross-model feature corequisites.
Incorrect use of this feature can result in the creation and shipment of incorrect and/or incomplete configurations. Therefore, it must be added or removed if changes are made to the system-level configuration.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: See table above.
- Limitations: Feature #0241 #0242, #0243, and #0244 are not supported if feature #4422 is ordered
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0403) Encryption not capable
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
The government agency for the People's Republic of China and Russia have new encryption compliance requirements on products sold into China and Russia. This feature ensures the non-encryption certification key is produced for China and Russia shipments to comply with the requirements.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0404) - TDCPP free indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This indicator acts as a safety value to insure any assembly/PNs being shipped is TDCPP free. It is only required if the unit is going to be shipped to a jurisdiction that requires the removal of TDCPP from components.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 1)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#0600) All-flash indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------------- 0600 All-flash indicator
This feature indicates that the machine will be configured with flash drives (features #6xxx) only. The maximum number of flash drives supported for this configuration will follow the rules of the existing flash drives (features #6xxx). It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0603) SAS-SSD mix indicator
This feature indicates that the machine will be configured with solid state drives (features #6xxx) and SAS disk drives (#5xx8) within a storage enclosure. Development will provide a document to manufacturing where to place the drive sets. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature will remove enclosure indicator features #1242, #1245, and #125x from the configuration to avoid any confusion and errors on the configuration output file.
A SCORE RPQ will be required and the RPQ team will provide a password to validate the configuration.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #0603 requires feature #0604 to be selected
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#0604) SSD custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0604 SSD custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select
additional SSD enclosure indicators (feature #1245, or #125x)
allowing the SSD's to be spread over additional DA pairs to optimize
performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system
will allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive
enclosures first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the
enclosure is allowed.
The number of SSD indicators cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of enclosure indicators cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
Assuming no HDDs, for example, where a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the normal quantity of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator) is two. This will result in two sets of SSDs being installed in the first enclosure pair and two sets of SSDs being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two DA pairs.
Alternatively, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of four of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator). This would result in a set of SSDs being installed in each of the four enclosure pairs, spread across four DA pairs.
Additionally, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of three of feature #1245. This would result in the installation of two sets of SSDs in the first enclosure pair, a set of SSDs in the second enclosure pair, and a set of SSDs in the third enclosure pair, spread across three DA pairs.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0606) Flash card sets custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 0606 Flash card sets custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select high
performance flash enclosure (HPFE) pair (feature #1600) allowing the
flash card sets to be spread across HPFE pair to optimize performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system will
allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive enclosures
first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the enclosure
is allowed.
The number of HPFE pair cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of HPFE pair cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
For DS8886 example, where a quantity of four of feature #1610 (400 GB 2.5-inch flash card) is ordered, when feature #0606 is selected, quantity 2 of feature #1600 (HPFE pair) can be manually selected. This will result in first two sets of flash card sets being installed in the first enclosure pair and second sets of being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two microbays.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0785) - Safe Guarded Copy Indicator
This feature indicates that the product uses Safe Guard Copy (SGC) functionallity.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 1)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Both
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#0795-#08xx) Initial system capacity
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0795 Up to 5 TB capacity 0796 5.1 TB to 10 TB capacity 0797 10.1 TB to 25 TB capacity 0798 25.1 TB to 50 TB capacity 0799 50.1 TB to 75 TB capacity 0801 75.1 TB to 100 TB capacity 0803 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 0804 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 0806 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 0807 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 0808 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 0809 6000.1 TB or 12000 TB capacity
These features indicate the total capacity of a system (base unit and any attached expansion unit models) at initial order. They are for administrative purposes only.
To determine the total capacity, perform the following calculation:
- Determine the total number of #5xx8 and #6xxx disk drive features on the order for each disk drive capacity (each quantity represents 16 drives for #5xx8 except #58x8 represents 8 drives) and the total number of #16xx flash card features on the order for each flash card capacity (each quantity represents 16 cards for #16xx)
- Multiply each total by its respective disk drive capacity (i.e., 300 GB, 400 GB, 600 GB, 800 GB, 1.2 TB, 1.6 TB, 1.8 TB, 3.2 TB, 4 TB, or 6 TB)
- Add together all the resulting values
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0930) IBM/Openwave alliance indicator
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/Openwave strategic alliance. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0931 - #0936) IBM attachment indicators
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 0931 IBM System i indicator 0932 IBM System p indicator 0933 IBM System x indicator 0934 IBM System z indicator 0935 IBM System z B/C indicator 0936 IBM System zEnterprise Cloud indicator
These features indicate the IBM System Server environments in which the machine will be used. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
All applicable features should be specified.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One per feature number
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0940) Linux indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a Linux environment (that is, it will be attached to servers running the Linux operating system). It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0952) Storage Appliance indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used with model AP1 (that is, it will be attached to appliances running SKLM or CSM). It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0960 - #0963) IBM storage indicators
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------- 0960 IBM ProtecTIER indicator 0961 IBM Storwize V7000 indicator 0962 IBM N series indicator 0963 IBM SAN Volume Controller indicator
These features indicate the machine will be attached with other IBM System Storage configurations. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0964) IBM/EPIC indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------------------- 0964 IBM/EPIC indicator (for EPIC software environment)
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/EPIC software environment. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0965) VMware VAAI indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a VMware VAAI support environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0966) OpenStack indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used with OpenStack SW driver support Cloud environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0983) US TAA compliance indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature is for the US Government customers and customers ordering on behalf of the US Government. When used, it provides the DS8000 as a TAA compliant system. It should not be used except where bids or customers require TAA compliance and orders with this feature number will be reviewed for relevance. The maximum order quantity for this feature is one and is for initial plant order only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None, but a post-configuration/order review will be made to ensure TAA compliance is required
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#12x1) HD disk enclosure pair
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1241 HD disk enclosure pair
This feature provides two disk enclosures. A disk enclosure pair supports up to 48 disk drives (2.5-inch disk) or 24 disk drives (3.5-inch disk).
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either 16, 32, or 48 disk drives (features #5xx8 and/or #6xx8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 16 or 32 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1245, #125x, and #1244.
- Minimum required: None if feature #1600 is present in the configuration and one if feature #1600 is not present in the configuration
- Maximum allowed: Three
- Corequisites: Each #1241 feature requires one feature #1242, #1244, #1245, or #125x. The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1244, #1245, and #125x.
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- #5xx8 and #6xx8 features can be installed within the same disk enclosure pair as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Only #58x8 features can be installed within the 3.5-inch disk enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#12xx) SSD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1245 HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1256 HD 800 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1257 HD 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicator
The number of 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicators are based on the number of SSD capacity drive types selected by the user and each enclosure indicator indicates up to three sets of SSD drives of the same capacity type.
This feature notifies manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 400, 800, and 1,600 GB SSD drives. It is for administrative purposes only.
User have the options to spread the SSD drives on individual SSD enclosure or installed up to three SSD drive sets on one SSD enclosure.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Three
- Corequisites: Each feature #1245 requires a minimum of one #6158 feature. Each feature #1256 requires a minimum of one #6258 feature. Each feature #1257 requires a minimum of one #6358 feature.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#8xxx) Function Authorization indicators
(#8450, #8452-6, #8460)
(No Longer Available as of June 16, 2017)
Feature Description IBM 2839 corequisite
------- ---------------------------------------- -----------------------
8151 BF - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8151
8152 BF - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8152
8153 BF - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8153
8154 BF - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8154
8155 BF - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8155
8156 BF - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8156
8160 BF - 6000.1 TB to 12000 TB Model LF8 feature #8160
8250 CS - Inactive Model LF8 feature #8250
8251 CS - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8251
8252 CS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8252
8253 CS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8253
8254 CS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8254
8255 CS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8255
8256 CS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8256
8260 CS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB Model LF8 feature #8260
8300 zsS - Active Model LF8 feature #8300
8350 zsS - Inactive Model LF8 feature #8350
8351 zsS - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8351
8352 zsS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8352
8353 zsS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8353
8354 zsS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8354
8355 zsS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8355
8356 zsS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8356
8360 zsS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB Model LF8 feature #8360
8450 CSM on HMC - Inactive Model LF8 feature #8450
8451 CSM on HMC - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8451
8452 CSM on HMC - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8452
8453 CSM on HMC - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8453
8454 CSM on HMC - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB Model LF8 feature #8454
capacity
8455 CSM on HMC - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB Model LF8 feature #8455
capacity
8456 CSM on HMC - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB Model LF8 feature #8456
capacity
8460 CSM on HMC - 6000.1 TB to 100,000 TB Model LF8 feature #8460
For Copy Services Manager on HMC's entitlement, order on IBM Copy Services Manager 6.x.x (5725-Z54) is required before you can configure Copy Services Manager on HMC on MT283x on the required capacity. Ensure the number of years for software support and maintenance is purchased is tied to the warranty of the MT283x.
These features enable a licensed function subject to the client applying a feature activation code made available by IBM. They are also used for maintenance billing purposes.
DS8000 Series Function Authorization (machine type 2839) feature numbers must be purchased to establish the extent of IBM authorization for the licensed function before the feature activation code is provided by IBM.
As 2839 Function Authorization #8xxx features are ordered (plant and field install), the same #8xxx features (in the same quantity) must also be ordered against the 2834 machine.
- Minimum required: At least one of the #8151 - #8160 features
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature #8x50: One
- Feature #8300: One
- Feature #8x51: 10 (each quantity represent per 10 TB)
- Features #8x52 : 10 (each quantity represent per 15 TB)
- Features #8x53 : 10 (each quantity represent per 25 TB)
- Features #8x54 : 10 (each quantity represent per 75 TB)
- Features #8x55 : 10 (each quantity represent per 175 TB)
- Features #8x56 : 10 (each quantity represent per 300 TB)
- Features #8x60 : 12 (188 for feature #8460) (each quantity represent per 500 TB)
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: Feature codes #8300 and #8350 cannot co-exist
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#8999) IGF transaction indicator
This feature is used to designate that a new 2834 machine is involved in an IGF transaction (lease or financing). It is for administrative purposes only.
When a new 2834 machine is involved in an IGF transaction, this feature must be ordered as a Record Purposes Only (RPO) MES. The RPO MES order must be placed using AAS or WTAAS; it cannot be ordered using e-config.
This feature is field-install only and cannot be included on the 2834 initial order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#9994) Certified Pre-Owned Indicator
This feature indicates an order for a refurbished machine under the terms of the Certified Pre-Owned offering. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#AG00) Shipping and Handling - No charge
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates Model 985 will have no shipping and handling charge added to the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
No charge features for Model 85E
(#000x) Model 8xE merge indicators
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ----------------- 0003 8xE factory merge 0004 8xE field merge
These features notify Manufacturing on whether the expansion unit model is subject to a factory merge or field merge with the base unit model. This feature is for administrative purposes only.
Feature #0003 is required if the expansion unit model is being ordered with the initial order of the base unit model. It notifies Manufacturing that a factory merge of the base unit and expansion unit is required.
Feature #0004 is required if the expansion unit model is being ordered for an installed base unit model. It notifies Manufacturing that a field merge of the base unit and expansion unit is required.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0017)
This feature indicates the customer (enterprise) does not have a CSM on HMC software license and a license will be ordered using Passport Advantage.
Software order indicator feature 0017 (along with feature 84xx) must be specified on the machine type 283x ordered for a given customer.
This feature is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Comments:
- CSM PA order number has to be input before 84xx feature code can be selected
- CSM has to be ordered through Passport Advantage before feature code #0017 can be selected
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0020) DoD indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------- 0020 DoD indicator
This feature provides a special label required for Department of Defense orders.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0021) JEMT indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature is used to indicate an IBM internal order for machine under the Joint Engineering Manufacturing Test (JEMT) program. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#01xx) Input power indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- -------------------------- 0101 Single phase 200-220V, 30A 0102 Single phase 220-240V, 30A
This feature indicates how many HDD/SSD drive sets, flash enclosure pair and host adapter cards can be supported on the first expansion model. This feature is for administrative purposes only.
1 count = 3 HDD/SSD drive sets, 1 Flash enclosure pair, 8 Host adapter cards.
Total count (<=8) = HDD or SSD drive set + # Flash enclosure pair +
Total count (<=8) = HDD or SSD drive set + # Flash enclosure pair + #Host Adapter card if feature #0101 is selected.
No restriction if feature #0102 is selected.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Either RPQ8S1479 or 8S1481 must be selected
- Limitations: Only for 8-core (#4422) or 16-core (#4423)
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0110) Cables indicator
This feature is used to indicate that addition of cables is required to support the extended distance on previous expansion frame. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Either feature #1252 or #1253 must be present on the existing configuration and features #1249 or #1251 must be ordered.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#0200) Shipping weight reduction
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature ensures the maximum shipping weight of the machine does not exceed 909 kg (2,000 lb.) during the initial shipment.
The machine weight is reduced by removing selected components, which will be shipped separately. The components are installed into the machine by the IBM service representative during the machine installation. This feature will increase the machine installation time and should only be ordered if required.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#024x) Model 8xE position indicators
Feature Description System-level corequisites ------- -------------------- ---------------------------- 0241 98x - 8xE position 1 Model 85E with feature #0241 0242 98x - 8xE position 2 Model 85E with feature #0242 0243 98x - 8xE position 3 Model 85E with feature #0243 0244 98x - 8xE position 4 Model 85E with feature #0244
These features indicate the presence of an attached Model 8xE expansion unit. They are used to determine multi-model system configuration rules, including cross-model feature corequisites.
Incorrect use of this feature can result in the creation and shipment of incorrect and/or incomplete configurations. Therefore, it must be added or removed if changes are made to the system-level configuration.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: Feature #0241, #0242, #0243, and #0244 are not supported if feature #4422 is ordered
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0404) - TDCPP free indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This indicator acts as a safety value to insure any assembly/PNs being shipped is TDCPP free. It is only required if the unit is going to be shipped to a jurisdiction that requires the removal of TDCPP from components.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 1)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#0603) SAS-SSD mix indicator
This feature indicates that the machine will be configured with solid state drives (features #6xxx) and SAS disk drives (#5xx8) within a storage enclosure. Development will provide a document to manufacturing where to place the drive sets. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature will remove enclosure indicator features #1242, #1245, and #125x from the configuration to avoid any confusion and errors on the configuration output file.
A SCORE RPQ will be required and the RPQ team will provide a password to validate the configuration.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #0603 requires feature #0604 to be selected
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#0604) SSD custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0604 SSD custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select
additional SSD enclosure indicators (feature #1245, or #125x)
allowing the SSD's to be spread over additional DA pairs to optimize
performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system
will allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive
enclosures first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the
enclosure is allowed.
The number of SSD indicators cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of enclosure indicators cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
Assuming no HDDs, for example, where a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the normal quantity of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator) is two. This will result in two sets of SSDs being installed in the first enclosure pair and two sets of SSDs being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two DA pairs.
Alternatively, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of four of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator). This would result in a set of SSDs being installed in each of the four enclosure pairs, spread across four DA pairs.
Additionally, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of three of feature #1245. This would result in the installation of two sets of SSDs in the first enclosure pair, a set of SSDs in the second enclosure pair, and a set of SSDs in the third enclosure pair, spread across three DA pairs.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0606) Flash card sets custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 0606 Flash card sets custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select high
performance flash enclosure (HPFE) pair (feature #1600) allowing the
flash card sets to be spread across HPFE pair to optimize performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system will
allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive enclosures
first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the enclosure
is allowed.
The number of HPFE pair cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of HPFE pair cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
For DS8886 example, where a quantity of four of feature #1610 (400 GB 2.5-inch flash card) is ordered, when feature #0606 is selected, quantity 2 of feature #1600 (HPFE pair) can be manually selected. This will result in first two sets of flash card sets being installed in the first enclosure pair and second sets of being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two microbays.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0795-#08xx) Initial system capacity
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0795 Up to 5 TB capacity 0796 5.1 TB to 10 TB capacity 0797 10.1 TB to 25 TB capacity 0798 25.1 TB to 50 TB capacity 0799 50.1 TB to 75 TB capacity 0801 75.1 TB to 100 TB capacity 0803 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 0804 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 0806 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 0807 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 0808 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 0809 6000.1 TB or 12000 TB capacity
These features indicate the total capacity of a system (base unit and any attached expansion unit models) at initial order. They are for administrative purposes only.
To determine the total capacity, perform the following calculation:
- Determine the total number of #5xx8 and #6xxx disk drive features on the order for each disk drive capacity (each quantity represents 16 drives for #5xx8 except #58x8 represents 8 drives) and the total number of #16xx flash card features on the order for each flash card capacity (each quantity represents 16 cards for #16xx)
- Multiply each total by its respective disk drive capacity (i.e., 300 GB, 400 GB, 600 GB, 800 GB, 1.2 TB, 1.6 TB, 1.8 TB, 3.2 TB, 4 TB, or 6 TB)
- Add together all the resulting values
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0930) IBM/Openwave alliance indicator
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/Openwave strategic alliance. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0931 - #0936) IBM attachment indicators
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 0931 IBM System i indicator 0932 IBM System p indicator 0933 IBM System x indicator 0934 IBM System z indicator 0935 IBM System z B/C indicator 0936 IBM System zEnterprise Cloud indicator
These features indicate the IBM System Server environments in which the machine will be used. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One per feature number
- Corequisites: When specified, a feature should be added to all models within the system (e.g., base unit model and all attached expansion unit models) and the 2839 Function Authorization model and features associated with the machine.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0940) Linux indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a Linux environment (that is, it will be attached to servers running the Linux operating system). It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0960 - #0963) IBM storage indicators
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------- 0960 IBM ProtecTIER indicator 0961 IBM Storwize V7000 indicator 0962 IBM N series indicator 0963 IBM SAN Volume Controller indicator
These features indicate the machine will be attached with other IBM System Storage configurations. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0964) IBM/EPIC indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------------------- 0964 IBM/EPIC indicator (for EPIC software environment)
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/EPIC software environment. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0965) VMware VAAI indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a VMware VAAI support environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0966) OpenStack indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used with OpenStack SW driver support Cloud environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0983) US TAA compliance indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature is for the US Government customers and customers ordering on behalf of the US Government. When used, it provides the DS8000 as a TAA compliant system. It should not be used except where bids or customers require TAA compliance and orders with this feature number will be reviewed for relevance. The maximum order quantity for this feature is one and is for initial plant order only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None, but a post-configuration/order review will be made to ensure TAA compliance is required
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#12x1) HD disk enclosure pair
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1241 HD disk enclosure pair
This feature indicates the total number of disk enclosures pair. The HD disk enclosure pair supports up to 48 disk drives. (2.5-inch disk) or 24 disk drives (3.5-inch disk).
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either 16, 32, or 48 disk drives (features #5xx8 and/or #6xx8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 16 or 32 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1244, #1245, and #125x.
Refer to the table below to determine the required quantity of feature #1241.
Model 85E Model 85E Model 85E Model
- #0243 - #0242 - #0241 985 -
Disk Disk Disk required
enclosure enclosure enclosure #1241
pair pair pair minimum
quantity quantity #1241 quantity
minimum
quantity
--------- --------- --------- --------
- 2 0 1
- 3 0 2
1 4 0 3
4 5 2 -
5 6 3 -
6 7 - -
7 8 - -
2 4 -
3 5 -
8 9 - -
Model 85E Model 85E
- #0244 - #0243
Disk Disk
enclosure enclosure
pair pair
quantity minimum
quantity
required
--------- ---------
1 2
2 3
3 4
4 5
5 6
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Five are allowed if feature #0241 is ordered. Nine are allowed if either features #0242 or #0243 are ordered. Six are allowed if feature #0244 is ordered
- Corequisites:
- Each #12x1 feature requires one of features #5xxx or #6xxx
- One of these features must be #5xx8 or #6xx8
- Each #1241 feature requires one of feature #1242, #1244, #1245, or #125x
- The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1244, #1245, and #125x
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity and speed). If the disk enclosure pair is populated with 16 drives of a withdrawn type, a drive of the same capacity but a higher speed may be installed.
- #5xx8 and #6xx8 features can be installed within the same disk enclosure pair as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed).
- Only #58x8 features can be installed within the 3.5-inch disk enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#12xx) SSD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1245 HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1256 HD 800 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1257 HD1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicator
The number of 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicators are based on the number of SSD capacity drive types selected by the user and each enclosure indicator indicates up to three sets of SSD drives of the same capacity type.
This feature notifies manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 400, 800, and 1,600 GB SSD drives. It is for administrative purposes only.
User have the options to spread the SSD drives on individual SSD enclosure or installed up to three SSD drive sets on one SSD enclosure.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Five are allowed if feature #0241 is ordered. Nine are allowed if either features #0242 or #0243 are ordered. Six are allowed if feature #0244 is ordered
- Corequisites: Each feature #1245 requires a minimum of one #6158 feature. Each feature #1256 requires a minimum of one #6258 feature. Each feature #1257 requires a minimum of one #6358 feature.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#198x) DS8000 LMC R8.x indicator
(#1982) DS8000 LMC R8.2 indicator
(No longer available as of November 21, 2018)
(#1983) DS8000 LMC R8.3 indicator
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
(#1984) DS8000 LMC R8.4 indicator
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
Feature Description System-level corequisite
------- ----------------------- --------------------------
1982 DS8000 LMC R8.2 #1882 feature on Model 985
indicator
1983 DS8000 LMC R8.3 #1883 feature on Model 985
indicator
1984 DS8000 LMC R8.4 #1884 feature on Model 985
indicator
1985 DS8000 LMC R8.5 #1885 feature on Model 985
indicator
This feature provides DS8000 Licensed Machine Code (LMC) R8.x corresponding to the appropriate bundle family. It is used as an indicator on the LMC versions loaded on the base model and allows manufacturing to build the appropriate drive types for the expansion frame.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Limitations: None
- Plant install/field install:
- For feature #1982, #1983: Field only
- For feature #1984, #1985: Both
(#9994) Certified Pre-Owned Indicator
This feature indicates an order for a refurbished machine under the terms of the Certified Pre-Owned offering. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#AG00) Shipping and Handling - No charge
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates Model 85E will have no shipping and handling charge added to the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
No charge features for Model 986
(#000x) Model 8xE merge indicators
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description Corequisite ------- ----------------- ------------- 0003 8xE factory merge Feature #024x
This feature indicates an expansion unit model is being ordered with the initial order of the base unit model, and notifies Manufacturing that a factory merge of the base unit and expansion unit is required. This feature is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0017)
This feature indicates the customer (enterprise) does not have a CSM on HMC software license and a license will be ordered using Passport Advantage.
Software order indicator feature 0017 (along with feature 84xx) must be specified on the machine type 283x ordered for a given customer.
This feature is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Comments:
- CSM PA order number has to be input before 84xx feature code can be selected
- CSM has to be ordered through Passport Advantage before feature code #0017 can be selected
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0020) DoD indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------- 0020 DoD indicator
This feature provides a special label required for Department of Defense orders.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0021) JEMT indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature is used to indicate an IBM internal order for machine under the Joint Engineering Manufacturing Test (JEMT) program. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0200) Shipping weight reduction
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature ensures the maximum shipping weight of the machine does not exceed 909 kg (2,000 lb) during the initial shipment.
The machine weight is reduced by removing selected components, which will be shipped separately. The components are installed into the machine by the IBM service representative during the machine installation. This feature will increase the machine installation time and should only be ordered if required.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#024x) Model 8xE position indicators
Feature Description System-level corequisites ------- -------------------- ---------------------------- 0241 98x - 8xE position 1 Model 986 with feature #0241 0242 98x - 8xE position 2 Model 986 with feature #0242 0243 98x - 8xE position 3 Model 986 with feature #0243 0244 98x - 8xE position 4 Model 986 with feature #0244
These features indicate the presence of an attached Model 8xE expansion unit. They are used to determine multi-model system configuration rules, including cross-model feature corequisites.
Incorrect use of this feature can result in the creation and shipment of incorrect and/or incomplete configurations. Therefore, it must be added or removed if changes are made to the system-level configuration.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: See table above.
- Limitations: Feature #0241, #0242, #0243, and #0244 are not supported if feature #4422 is ordered
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0403) Encryption not capable
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
The government agency for the People's Republic of China and Russia have new encryption compliance requirements on products sold into China and Russia. This feature ensures the non-encryption certification key is produced for China and Russia shipments to comply with the requirements.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0404) - TDCPP free indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This indicator acts as a safety value to insure any assembly/PNs being shipped is TDCPP free. It is only required if the unit is going to be shipped to a jurisdiction that requires the removal of TDCPP from components.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 1)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#0600) All-flash indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------------- 0600 All-flash indicator
This feature indicates that the machine will be configured with flash drives (features #6xxx) only. The maximum number of flash drives supported for this configuration will follow the rules of the existing flash drives (features #6xxx). It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0603) SAS-SSD mix indicator
This feature indicates that the machine will be configured with solid state drives (features #6xxx) and SAS disk drives (#5xx8) within a storage enclosure. Development will provide a document to manufacturing where to place the drive sets. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature will remove enclosure indicator features #1242, #1245, and #125x from the configuration to avoid any confusion and errors on the configuration output file.
A SCORE RPQ will be required and the RPQ team will provide a password to validate the configuration.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #0603 requires feature #0604 to be selected
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#0604) SSD custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0604 SSD custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select
additional SSD enclosure indicators (feature #1245, or #125x)
allowing the SSD's to be spread over additional DA pairs to optimize
performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system
will allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive
enclosures first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the
enclosure is allowed.
The number of SSD indicators cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of enclosure indicators cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
Assuming no HDDs, for example, where a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the normal quantity of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator) is two. This will result in two sets of SSDs being installed in the first enclosure pair and two sets of SSDs being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two DA pairs.
Alternatively, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of four of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator). This would result in a set of SSDs being installed in each of the four enclosure pairs, spread across four DA pairs.
Additionally, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of three of feature #1245. This would result in the installation of two sets of SSDs in the first enclosure pair, a set of SSDs in the second enclosure pair, and a set of SSDs in the third enclosure pair, spread across three DA pairs.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0606) Flash card sets custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 0606 Flash card sets custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select high
performance flash enclosure (HPFE) pair (feature #1600) allowing the
flash card sets to be spread across HPFE pair to optimize performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system will
allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive enclosures
first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the enclosure
is allowed.
The number of HPFE pair cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of HPFE pair cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
For DS8886 example, where a quantity of four of feature #1610 (400 GB 2.5-inch flash card) is ordered, when feature #0606 is selected, quantity 2 of feature #1600 (HPFE pair) can be manually selected. This will result in first two sets of flash card sets being installed in the first enclosure pair and second sets of being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two microbays.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0785) - Safe Guarded Copy Indicator
This feature indicates that the product uses Safe Guard Copy (SGC) functionallity.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 1)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Both
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#0795-#08xx) Initial system capacity
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0795 Up to 5 TB capacity 0796 5.1 TB to 10 TB capacity 0797 10.1 TB to 25 TB capacity 0798 25.1 TB to 50 TB capacity 0799 50.1 TB to 75 TB capacity 0801 75.1 TB to 100 TB capacity 0803 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 0804 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 0806 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 0807 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 0808 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 0809 6000.1 TB or 12000 TB capacity
These features indicate the total capacity of a system (base unit and any attached expansion unit models) at initial order. They are for administrative purposes only.
To determine the total capacity, perform the following calculation:
- Determine the total number of #5xx8 and #6xxx disk drive features on the order for each disk drive capacity (each quantity represents 16 drives for #5xx8 except #58x8 represents 8 drives) and the total number of #16xx flash card features on the order for each flash card capacity (each quantity represents 16 cards for #16xx)
- Multiply each total by its respective disk drive capacity (i.e., 300 GB, 400 GB, 600 GB, 800 GB, 1.2 TB, 1.6 TB, 1.8 TB, 3.2 TB, 4 TB, or 6 TB)
- Add together all the resulting values
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0930) IBM/Openwave alliance indicator
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/Openwave strategic alliance. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0931 - #0936) IBM attachment indicators
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 0931 IBM System i indicator 0932 IBM System p indicator 0933 IBM System x indicator 0934 IBM System z indicator 0935 IBM System z B/C indicator 0936 IBM System zEnterprise Cloud indicator
These features indicate the IBM System Server environments in which the machine will be used. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
All applicable features should be specified.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One per feature number
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0940) Linux indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a Linux environment (that is, it will be attached to servers running the Linux operating system). It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0952) Storage Appliance indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used with model AP1 (that is, it will be attached to appliances running SKLM or CSM). It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0960 - #0963) IBM storage indicators
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------- 0960 IBM ProtecTIER indicator 0961 IBM Storwize V7000 indicator 0962 IBM N series indicator 0963 IBM SAN Volume Controller indicator
These features indicate the machine will be attached with other IBM System Storage configurations. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0964) IBM/EPIC indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------------------- 0964 IBM/EPIC indicator (for EPIC software environment)
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/EPIC software environment. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0965) VMware VAAI indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a VMware VAAI support environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0966) OpenStack indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used with OpenStack SW driver support Cloud environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0983) US TAA compliance indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature is for the US Government customers and customers ordering on behalf of the US Government. When used, it provides the DS8000 as a TAA compliant system. It should not be used except where bids or customers require TAA compliance and orders with this feature number will be reviewed for relevance. The maximum order quantity for this feature is one and is for initial plant order only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None, but a post-configuration/order review will be made to ensure TAA compliance is required
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#120x) Disk drive enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1202 HD STD enclosure indicator 1204 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
Both features are only used during model conversions. These features are not meant for initial order and MES order. Feature #1202 represents feature #1242 and feature #1204 represents #1244. These features are for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: Each feature #1202 requires one feature #5xxx. One of these features must be feature #5001-#5006 or #5xx8 (excluding #5005, #5007, and #58x8 features). Each #1204 feature requires one #5005, #5007, or #58x8 features.
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a STD disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Features #5001-#5006 or #5xx8 (excluding features #5005, #5007, and #58x8) can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed). Used during model conversions only.
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#12x1) HD disk enclosure pair
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1241 HD disk enclosure pair
This feature indicates the total number of disk enclosures pair. A disk enclosure pair supports up to 48 disk drives (2.5-inch disk) or 24 disk drives (3.5-inch disk).
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either 16, 32, or 48 disk drives (features #5xx8 and/or #6xx8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 16 or 32 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1245, #125x, and #1244.
- Minimum required: None if feature #1600 is present in the configuration and one if feature #1600 is not present in the configuration
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: Each #1241 feature requires one feature #1242, #1244, #1245, or #125x. The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1244, #1245, and #125x.
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- #5xx8 and #6xx8 features can be installed within the same disk enclosure pair as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Only #58x8 features can be installed within the 3.5-inch disk enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#12xx) SSD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1245 HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1256 HD 800 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1257 HD 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicator
The number of 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicators are based on the number of SSD capacity drive types selected by the user and each enclosure indicator indicates up to three sets of SSD drives of the same capacity type.
This feature notifies manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 400, 800, and 1,600 GB SSD drives. It is for administrative purposes only.
User have the options to spread the SSD drives on individual SSD enclosure or installed up to three SSD drive sets on one SSD enclosure.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: Each feature #1245 requires a minimum of one #6158 feature. Each feature #1256 requires a minimum of one #6258 feature. Each feature #1257 requires a minimum of one #6358 feature.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#5xxx) Disk drive set indicators
Feature Description ------- ---------------------------------- 5001 300 GB 15K drive set indicator 5002 600 GB 15K drive set indicator 5003 600 GB 10K drive set indicator 5004 1.2 TB 10K drive set indicator 5005 4 TB 7.2K half drive set indicator 5006 1.8 TB 10K drive set indicator 5007 6 TB 7.2K half drive set indicator
These features are used during model conversions only. These features are not meant for initial order and MES order. Any additional capacity of drive sets that are required during MES, select features #5xx8. Similar drive types (capacity and speed) are allowed within the same enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Six.
- Corequisites:
- Feature #5308 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #5001 as a representation on model 986
- Feature #5618 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #5002 as a representation on model 986
- Feature #5708 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #5003 as a representation on model 986
- Feature #5768 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #5004 as a representation on model 986
- Feature #5868 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #5005 as a representation on model 986
- Feature #5778 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #5006 as a representation on model 986
- Feature #5878 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #5007 as a representation on model 986
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Features #1204 and #2997 may be required for features #5005 and #5007
- Features #1202 and #2999 may be required for features #5001-#5004 and #5006
- Limitations: No intermix between #5xxx and #6xxx features within an enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#6xxx) Disk drive set indicators
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 6002 400 GB SSD drive set indicator 6003 800 GB SSD drive set indicator 6004 1.6 TB SSD drive set indicator
These features are used during model conversions only. These features are not meant for initial order and MES order. Any additional capacity of SSD drive sets that are required during MES, select features #6x58. Similar SSD drive types (capacity and speed) are allowed place within the same enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Six.
- Corequisites:
- Feature #6158 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #6002 as a representation on model 986
- Feature #6258 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #6003 as a representation on model 986
- Feature #6358 must be available on model 961 in order to use feature #6004 as a representation on model 986
- Additional #1202 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Limitations: All SSD drives installed within a disk enclosure must be of the same capacity type (features #6xxx)
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#8xxx) Function Authorization indicators
(#8450, #8452-6, #8460)
(No Longer Available as of June 16, 2017)
Feature Description IBM 2839 corequisite
------- ---------------------------------------- -----------------------
8151 BF - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8151
8152 BF - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8152
8153 BF - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8153
8154 BF - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8154
8155 BF - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8155
8156 BF - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8156
8160 BF - 6000.1 TB to 12000 TB Model LF8 feature #8160
8250 CS - Inactive Model LF8 feature #8250
8251 CS - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8251
8252 CS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8252
8253 CS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8253
8254 CS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8254
8255 CS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8255
8256 CS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8256
8260 CS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB Model LF8 feature #8260
8300 zsS - Active Model LF8 feature #8300
8350 zsS - Inactive Model LF8 feature #8350
8351 zsS - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8351
8352 zsS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8352
8353 zsS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8353
8354 zsS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8354
8355 zsS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8355
8356 zsS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8356
8360 zsS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB Model LF8 feature #8360
8450 CSM on HMC - Inactive Model LF8 feature #8450
8451 CSM on HMC - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8451
8452 CSM on HMC - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8452
8453 CSM on HMC - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8453
8454 CSM on HMC - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB Model LF8 feature #8454
capacity
8455 CSM on HMC - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB Model LF8 feature #8455
capacity
8456 CSM on HMC - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB Model LF8 feature #8456
capacity
8460 CSM on HMC - 6000.1 TB to 100,000 TB Model LF8 feature #8460
For Copy Services Manager on HMC's entitlement, order on IBM Copy Services Manager 6.x.x (5725-Z54) is required before you can configure Copy Services Manager on HMC on MT283x on the required capacity. Ensure the number of years for software support and maintenance is purchased is tied to the warranty of the MT283x.
These features enable a licensed function subject to the client applying a feature activation code made available by IBM. They are also used for maintenance billing purposes.
DS8000 Series Function Authorization (machine type 2839) feature numbers must be purchased to establish the extent of IBM authorization for the licensed function before the feature activation code is provided by IBM.
As 2839 Function Authorization #8xxx features are ordered (plant and field install), the same #8xxx features (in the same quantity) must also be ordered against the 2834 machine.
- Minimum required: At least one of the #8151 - #8160 features
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature #8x50: One
- Feature #8300: One
- Feature #8x51: 10 (each quantity represent per 10 TB)
- Features #8x52 : 10 (each quantity represent per 15 TB)
- Features #8x53 : 10 (each quantity represent per 25 TB)
- Features #8x54 : 10 (each quantity represent per 75 TB)
- Features #8x55 : 10 (each quantity represent per 175 TB)
- Features #8x56 : 10 (each quantity represent per 300 TB)
- Features #8x60 : 12 (188 for feature #8460) (each quantity represent per 500 TB)
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: Feature codes #8300 and #8350 cannot co-exist
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#8xxx) Function Authorization indicators
Feature Description IBM 283x-LF8
corequisite
------- ----------------------------------- -----------------------
8171 BF - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8171
8172 BF - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8172
8173 BF - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8173
8174 BF - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8174
8175 BF - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8175
8176 BF - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8176
8180 BF - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB Model LF8 feature #8180
8271 CS - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8271
8272 CS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8272
8273 CS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8273
8274 CS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8274
8275 CS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8275
8276 CS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8276
8280 CS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB Model LF8 feature #8280
8371 zsS - Up to 100 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8371
8372 zsS - 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8372
8373 zsS - 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8373
8374 zsS - 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8374
8375 zsS - 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8375
8376 zsS - 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity Model LF8 feature #8376
8380 zsS - 6000.1 TB to 10000 TB Model LF8 feature #8380
These features enable a licensed function subject to the client applying a feature activation code made available by IBM. They are also used for maintenance billing purposes.
DS8000 Series Function Authorization (machine types 2836, 2837, 2838, and 2839) feature numbers must be purchased to establish the extent of IBM authorization for the licensed function before the feature activation code is provided by IBM.
As 2836, 2837, 2838, and 2839 Function Authorization #8xxx features are ordered (plant and field install), the same #8xxx features (in the same quantity) must also be ordered against the 2831, 2832, 2833, and 2834 machines, respectively.
These features are used during model conversions only. These features are not meant for initial order and MES order. Any additional licenses that are required during MES, select features #8x51-#8x60.
- Minimum required: At least one of features #8171-#8180
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature #8x71: 10 (each quantity represents per 10 TB)
- Features #8x72: 10 (each quantity represents per 15 TB)
- Features #8x73: 10 (each quantity represents per 25 TB)
- Features #8x74: 10 (each quantity represents per 75 TB)
- Features #8x75: 10 (each quantity represents per 175 TB)
- Features #8x76: 10 (each quantity represents per 300 TB)
- Features #8x80: 8 (each quantity represents per 500 TB)
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: These feature code are used for model conversions only
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#8999) IGF transaction indicator
This feature is used to designate that a new 2834 machine is involved in an IGF transaction (lease or financing). It is for administrative purposes only.
When a new 2834 machine is involved in an IGF transaction, this feature must be ordered as a Record Purposes Only (RPO) MES. The RPO MES order must be placed using AAS or WTAAS; it cannot be ordered using e-config.
This feature is field-install only and cannot be included on the 2834 initial order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#9994) Certified Pre-Owned Indicator
This feature indicates an order for a refurbished machine under the terms of the Certified Pre-Owned offering. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#AG00) Shipping and Handling - No charge
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates Model 986 will have no shipping and handling charge added to the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
No charge features for Model 86E
(#000x) Model 8xE merge indicators
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ----------------- 0003 8xE factory merge 0004 8xE field merge
These features notify Manufacturing on whether the expansion unit model is subject to a factory merge or field merge with the base unit model. This feature is for administrative purposes only.
Feature #0003 is required if the expansion unit model is being ordered with the initial order of the base unit model. It notifies Manufacturing that a factory merge of the base unit and expansion unit is required.
Feature #0004 is required if the expansion unit model is being ordered for an installed base unit model. It notifies Manufacturing that a field merge of the base unit and expansion unit is required.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0017)
This feature indicates the customer (enterprise) does not have a CSM on HMC software license and a license will be ordered using Passport Advantage.
Software order indicator feature 0017 (along with feature 84xx) must be specified on the machine type 283x ordered for a given customer.
This feature is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Comments:
- CSM PA order number has to be input before 84xx feature code can be selected
- CSM has to be ordered through Passport Advantage before feature code #0017 can be selected
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0020) DoD indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------- 0020 DoD indicator
This feature provides a special label required for Department of Defense orders.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0021) JEMT indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature is used to indicate an IBM internal order for machine under the Joint Engineering Manufacturing Test (JEMT) program. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#0110) Cables indicator
This feature is used to indicate that addition of cables is required to support the extended distance on previous expansion frame. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Either feature #1252 or #1253 must be present on the existing configuration and features #1249 or #1251 must be ordered.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#0200) Shipping weight reduction
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature ensures the maximum shipping weight of the machine does not exceed 909 kg (2,000 lb.) during the initial shipment.
The machine weight is reduced by removing selected components, which will be shipped separately. The components are installed into the machine by the IBM service representative during the machine installation. This feature will increase the machine installation time and should only be ordered if required.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#024x) Model 8xE position indicators
Feature Description System-level corequisites ------- -------------------- ---------------------------- 0241 98x - 8xE position 1 Model 86E with feature #0241 0242 98x - 8xE position 2 Model 86E with feature #0242 0243 98x - 8xE position 3 Model 86E with feature #0243 0244 98x - 8xE position 4 Model 86E with feature #0244
These features indicate the presence of an attached Model 8xE expansion unit. They are used to determine multi-model system configuration rules, including cross-model feature corequisites.
Incorrect use of this feature can result in the creation and shipment of incorrect and/or incomplete configurations. Therefore, it must be added or removed if changes are made to the system-level configuration.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: Feature #0241, #0242, #0243, and #0244 are not supported if feature #4422 is ordered
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0404) - TDCPP free indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This indicator acts as a safety value to insure any assembly/PNs being shipped is TDCPP free. It is only required if the unit is going to be shipped to a jurisdiction that requires the removal of TDCPP from components.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 1)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#0603) SAS-SSD mix indicator
This feature indicates that the machine will be configured with solid state drives (features #6xxx) and SAS disk drives (#5xx8) within a storage enclosure. Development will provide a document to manufacturing where to place the drive sets. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature will remove enclosure indicator features #1242, #1245, and #125x from the configuration to avoid any confusion and errors on the configuration output file.
A SCORE RPQ will be required and the RPQ team will provide a password to validate the configuration.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #0603 requires feature #0604 to be selected
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#0604) SSD custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0604 SSD custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select
additional SSD enclosure indicators (feature #1245 or #125x) allowing
the SSD's to be spread over additional DA pairs to optimize
performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system
will allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive
enclosures first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the
enclosure is allowed.
The number of SSD indicators cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of enclosure indicators cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
Assuming no HDDs, for example, where a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the normal quantity of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator) is two. This will result in two sets of SSDs being installed in the first enclosure pair and two sets of SSDs being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two DA pairs.
Alternatively, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of four of feature #1245 (HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator). This would result in a set of SSDs being installed in each of the four enclosure pairs, spread across four DA pairs.
Additionally, assuming a quantity of four of feature #6158 (400 GB SSD drive set) is ordered, the user can select feature #0604 and manually select a quantity of three of feature #1245. This would result in the installation of two sets of SSDs in the first enclosure pair, a set of SSDs in the second enclosure pair, and a set of SSDs in the third enclosure pair, spread across three DA pairs.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0606) Flash card sets custom placement indicator
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 0606 Flash card sets custom placement indicator
This feature gives users the opportunity to manually select high
performance flash enclosure (HPFE) pair (feature #1600) allowing the
flash card sets to be spread across HPFE pair to optimize performance.
Note: If you have ordered HDDs, the e-config system will
allocate the required number of 2.5-inch and 3.5-inch drive enclosures
first. No intermix of different capacity drives within the enclosure
is allowed.
The number of HPFE pair cannot be reduced from the minimum determined by e-config. Also, the total number of HPFE pair cannot be increased above the maximum allowed in the e-config system.
For DS8886 example, where a quantity of four of feature #1610 (400 GB 2.5-inch flash card) is ordered, when feature #0606 is selected, quantity 2 of feature #1600 (HPFE pair) can be manually selected. This will result in first two sets of flash card sets being installed in the first enclosure pair and second sets of being installed in the second enclosure pair, spread on two microbays.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0795-#08xx) Initial system capacity
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 0795 Up to 5 TB capacity 0796 5.1 TB to 10 TB capacity 0797 10.1 TB to 25 TB capacity 0798 25.1 TB to 50 TB capacity 0799 50.1 TB to 75 TB capacity 0801 75.1 TB to 100 TB capacity 0803 100.1 TB to 250 TB capacity 0804 250.1 TB to 500 TB capacity 0806 500.1 TB to 1250 TB capacity 0807 1250.1 TB to 3000 TB capacity 0808 3000.1 TB to 6000 TB capacity 0809 6000.1 TB or 12000 TB capacity
These features indicate the total capacity of a system (base unit and any attached expansion unit models) at initial order. They are for administrative purposes only.
To determine the total capacity, perform the following calculation:
- Determine the total number of #5xx8 and #6xxx disk drive features on the order for each disk drive capacity (each quantity represents 16 drives for #5xx8 except #58x8 represents 8 drives) and the total number of #16xx flash card features on the order for each flash card capacity (each quantity represents 16 cards for #16xx)
- Multiply each total by its respective disk drive capacity (i.e., 300 GB, 400 GB, 600 GB, 800 GB, 1.2 TB, 1.6 TB, 1.8 TB, 3.2 TB, 4 TB, or 6 TB)
- Add together all the resulting values
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0930) IBM/Openwave alliance indicator
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/Openwave strategic alliance. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0931 - #0936) IBM attachment indicators
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 0931 IBM System i indicator 0932 IBM System p indicator 0933 IBM System x indicator 0934 IBM System z indicator 0935 IBM System z B/C indicator 0936 IBM System zEnterprise Cloud indicator
These features indicate the IBM System Server environments in which the machine will be used. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One per feature number
- Corequisites: When specified, a feature should be added to all models within the system (e.g., base unit model and all attached expansion unit models) and the 2839 Function Authorization model and features associated with the machine.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0940) Linux indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a Linux environment (that is, it will be attached to servers running the Linux operating system). It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0960 - #0963) IBM storage indicators
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------- 0960 IBM ProtecTIER indicator 0961 IBM Storwize V7000 indicator 0962 IBM N series indicator 0963 IBM SAN Volume Controller indicator
These features indicate the machine will be attached with other IBM System Storage configurations. They are for administrative purposes only and do not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0964) IBM/EPIC indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------------------- 0964 IBM/EPIC indicator (for EPIC software environment)
This feature indicates the order is included in sales activity associated with the IBM/EPIC software environment. It is for administrative purposes only.
This feature should be used with both plant and MES order activity.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0965) VMware VAAI indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used in a VMware VAAI support environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0966) OpenStack indicator
This feature indicates the machine will be used with OpenStack SW driver support Cloud environment. It is for administrative purposes only and does not affect the technical capabilities of the machine.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#0983) US TAA compliance indicator
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This optional feature is for the US Government customers and customers ordering on behalf of the US Government. When used, it provides the DS8000 as a TAA compliant system. It should not be used except where bids or customers require TAA compliance and orders with this feature number will be reviewed for relevance. The maximum order quantity for this feature is one and is for initial plant order only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None, but a post-configuration/order review will be made to ensure TAA compliance is required
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#120x) Disk drive enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1202 HD STD enclosure indicator 1204 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
Both features are only used during model conversions. These features are not meant for initial order and MES order. Feature #1202 represents feature #1242 and feature #1204 represents #1244. These features are for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Four if feature #0241 exists, eight if feature #0242, #0243 or #0244 exists.
- Corequisites: Each feature #1202 requires one feature #5xxx. One of these features must be feature #5001-#5006 or #5xx8 (excluding #5005, #5007, and #58x8 features). Each #1204 feature requires one #5005, #5007, or #58x8 features.
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a STD disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Features #5001-#5006 or #5xx8 (excluding features #5005, #5007, and #58x8) can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed). Used during model conversions only.
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#12x1) HD disk enclosure pair
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1241 HD disk enclosure pair
This feature indicates the total number of disk enclosures pair. The HD disk enclosure pair supports up to 48 disk drives. (2.5-inch disk) or 24 disk drives (3.5-inch disk).
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either 16, 32, or 48 disk drives (features #5xx8 and/or #6xx8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 16 or 32 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1244, #1245, and #125x.
Refer to the table below to determine the required quantity of feature #1241.
Model 86E Model 86E Model 86E Model
- #0243 - #0242 - #0241 986 -
Disk Disk Disk required
enclosure enclosure enclosure #1241
pair pair pair minimum
quantity quantity #1241 quantity
minimum
quantity
--------- --------- --------- --------
2 2 0 1
3 3 0 2
4 4 4 -
5 5 4 -
6 6 4 -
7 7 4 -
8 8 4 -
1 1 - -
Model 86E Model 86E
- #0244 - #0243
Disk Disk
enclosure enclosure
pair pair
quantity minimum
quantity
required
--------- ---------
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four are allowed if feature #0241 is ordered. Eight are allowed if either features #0242, #0243, or #0244 are ordered
- Corequisites:
- Each #12x1 feature requires one of features #5xxx or #6xxx
- One of these features must be #5xx8 or #6xx8
- Each #1241 feature requires one of feature #1242, #1244, #1245, or #125x
- The required quantity of feature #1241 is equal to the addition of features #1242, #1244, #1245, and #125x
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity and speed). If the disk enclosure pair is populated with 16 drives of a withdrawn type, a drive of the same capacity but a higher speed may be installed
- #5xx8 and #6xx8 features can be installed within the same disk enclosure pair as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Only #58x8 features can be installed within the 3.5-inch disk enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#12xx) SSD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1245 HD 400 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1256 HD 800 GB SSD enclosure indicator 1257 HD 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicator
The number of 400 GB, 800 GB, and 1.6 TB SSD enclosure indicators are based on the number of SSD capacity drive types selected by the user and each enclosure indicator indicates up to three sets of SSD drives of the same capacity type.
This feature notifies manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 400, 800, and 1,600 GB SSD drives. It is for administrative purposes only.
User have the options to spread the SSD drives on individual SSD enclosure or installed up to three SSD drive sets on one SSD enclosure.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four are allowed if feature #0241 is ordered. Eight are allowed if either features #0242, #0243, or #0244 are ordered
- Corequisites: Each feature #1245 requires a minimum of one #6158 feature. Each feature #1256 requires a minimum of one #6258 feature. Each feature #1257 requires a minimum of one #6358 feature.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#198x) DS8000 LMC R8.x indicator
(#1982) DS8000 LMC R8.2 indicator
(No longer available as of November 21, 2018)
(#1983) DS8000 LMC R8.3 indicator
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
(#1984) DS8000 LMC R8.4 indicator
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
Feature Description System-level corequisite
------- ----------------------- --------------------------
1982 DS8000 LMC R8.2 #1882 feature on Model 986
indicator
1983 DS8000 LMC R8.3 #1883 feature on Model 986
indicator
1984 DS8000 LMC R8.4 #1884 feature on Model 986
indicator
1985 DS8000 LMC R8.5 #1885 feature on Model 986
indicator
This feature provides DS8000 Licensed Machine Code (LMC) R8.x corresponding to the appropriate bundle family. It is used as an indicator on the LMC versions loaded on the base model and allows manufacturing to build the appropriate drive types for the expansion frame.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Limitations: None
- Plant install/field install:
- For feature #1982, #1983: Field only
- For feature #1984, #1985: Both
(#5xxx) Disk drive set indicators
Feature Description ------- ---------------------------------- 5001 300 GB 15K drive set indicator 5002 600 GB 15K drive set indicator 5003 600 GB 10K drive set indicator 5004 1.2 TB 10K drive set indicator 5005 4 TB 7.2K half drive set indicator 5006 1.8 TB 10K drive set indicator 5007 6 TB 7.2K half drive set indicator
These features are used during model conversions only. These features are not meant for initial order and MES order. Any additional capacity of drive sets that are required during MES, select features #5xx8. Similar drive types (capacity and speed) are allowed within the same enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Maximum quantity is 12 if feature #0241 is ordered
- Maximum quantity is 24 if feature #0242, #0243, or #0244 are ordered
- Corequisites:
- Feature #5308 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #5001 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Feature #5618 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #5002 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Feature #5708 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #5003 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Feature #5768 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #5004 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Feature #5868 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #5005 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Feature #5778 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #5006 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Feature #5878 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #5007 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Features #1204 and #2997 may be required for features #5005 and #5007
- Features #1202 and #2999 may be required for features #5001-#5004 and #5006
- Limitations: No intermix between #5xxx and #6xxx features within an enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#6xxx) Disk drive set indicators
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------ 6002 400 GB SSD drive set indicator 6003 800 GB SSD drive set indicator 6004 1.6 TB SSD drive set indicator
These features are used during model conversions only. These features are not meant for initial order and MES order. Any additional capacity of SSD drive sets that are required during MES, select features #6x58. Similar SSD drive types (capacity and speed) are allowed within the same enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Maximum quantity is 12 if feature #0241 is ordered
- Maximum quantity is 24 if feature #0242, #0243 or #0244 are ordered
- Corequisites:
- Feature #6158 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #6002 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Feature #6258 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #6003 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Feature #6358 must be available on model 961/96E in order to use feature #6004 as a representation on model 986/86E
- Additional #1202 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Limitations: All SSD drives installed within a disk enclosure must be of the same capacity type (features #6xxx)
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#9994) Certified Pre-Owned Indicator
This feature indicates an order for a refurbished machine under the terms of the Certified Pre-Owned offering. It is for administrative purposes only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Initial
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#AG00) Shipping and Handling - No charge
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates Model 86E will have no shipping and handling charge added to the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
Chargeable features for Model 984
(#1014) - Front & rear door lock kit
This feature code provides two sets of lock/keys (one for the front door, one for the rear door).
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 0)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Both
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#1050) Single Phase DC-UPS
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature provides the primary source of power for the storage system.
- Minimum required: Two
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#1055) Extended PLD
This optional feature provides extended protection from a power line disturbance (PLD).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: If feature #1055 is selected, it must be selected for all units in the 2834 system. The 2834 system is defined as the 2834 base unit and all physically attached 2834 expansion units.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#10xx) Single phase line cords
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------------------------------- 1062 SPP cord, 200-240V, 60A, IEC 60309 3-pin customer connector 1063 SPP cord, 200-240V, 63A, no customer connector provided
These features are used to specify a single phase power configuration.
These features provide two single phase power cords to supply external power to the machine and also can be used to order replacement line cords. These features also cover the top exit power cord and the cable you order is meant for top exit. Order feature code #1101 for the overhead ladder.
- Minimum required: One per feature number (select either feature #1062 or #1063)
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1062 and #1063
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1101) Overhead ladder - 5-feet
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1101 Overhead ladder - 5-feet
One overhead ladder is recommended per data center. This feature is required for top exit installation of power cords and Fibre Channel cables.
- Minimum: None
- Maximum: One recommended per customer site. Can be deselected if desired.
- Corequisites: Features #1062, #1063, or #1400 may be required
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1103) Kick Step
Feature Description ------- ----------- 1103 Kick Step
One kick Step is recommended per data center. This feature is required for service/installation of High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2.
- Minimum: None
- Maximum: One recommended per customer site. Can be deselected if desired.
- Corequisites: Feature #1600 is required
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1140, #1150) Management console
(No longer available as of November 21, 2018)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1140 Mgmt console - Primary 1150 Mgmt console - Secondary
These features provide a dedicated PC consisting of a processor, keyboard, and display. The management console is used for machine configuration, management, and service activities, including call home and remote support.
Feature #1140 provides a management console that is installed (physically located) inside the machine. This feature is required.
Feature #1150 provides a secondary management console for mounting into model 984 system rack. The PC will share the existing keyboard and display with the primary management console. When used in accordance with IBM's associated documentation, this feature is capable of satisfying the applicable requirements of Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act, provided that any assistive technology used with the product properly interoperates with it.
Feature #1150 can also be used as a redundant management console for environments with high availability requirements. To help preserve console functionality, the management console is not available as a general purpose computing resource.
- Minimum required:
- Feature #1140: One. User is allowed to deselect this feature to select feature #1141
- Feature #1150: One. User is allowed to deselect this feature if required.
- Maximum allowed: One per feature number
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Feature #1150 can only be added to configurations with feature #1140 already selected
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only for feature #1140. Feature #1150 is plant and field install.
- Comments: Quantity one of feature #1140 or #1141 is required. Feature #1140 is the default.
(#1141) Management console - Primary v2
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature provides a dedicated PC consisting of a processor, keyboard, and display that is used for machine configuration, management, and service activities, including call home and remote support.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
- Comments: Quantity 1 of feature #1140 or #1141 is required
(#1151) Management console - Secondary v2
This feature provides a secondary management console for mounting into the system rack. The PC will share the existing keyboard and display with the primary management console and can be used as a redundant management console for environments with high availability requirements.
- Minimum required: 0 (1 if copy services feature #82xx is selected)
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Feature #1151 can only be added to configurations with feature #1141 already present
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: User is allowed to deselect this feature if required
(#1242) HD STD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------- 1242 HD STD enclosure indicator
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the small form factor on the enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: Each #1242 feature requires one #5xxx feature. One of these features must be feature #5xx8 (excluding #58x8 features).
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a STD disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- #5xx8 features (excluding #58x8 features) can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1244) 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1244 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 3.5-inch spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the large form factor on the enclosure pair.
A 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair (feature #1244) supports up to 24 disk drives. The 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair is populated with either 8, 16, or 24 disk drives (features #58x8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 8 or 16 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: Each #1244 feature requires one #58x8 feature
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a 3.5-inch disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- The #58x8 features can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#126x) BC Disk drive cables
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- --------------------------- 1261 BC Disk drive cable group A
This feature provides a complete set of Fibre Channel cables to connect all the disk drives (supported within the model) to their appropriate device adapters.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#1303) I/O enclosure pair PCIe G3
This feature provides two I/O enclosures. An I/O enclosure pair supports up to two device adapter pairs, four PCIe connection to support the flash enclosure, and up to eight host adapters.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1400) Top exit bracket
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 1400 Top exit bracket for Fibre cable
This feature provides the bracket to secure the Fibre cables and power line cords routed to the top of the system.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1400
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#141x - 142x) Fibre Channel/FICON cables
Feature Description
------- ----------------------------------------------------------------
1410 50 micron, 40 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connectors
1411 50 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connector
1412 50 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable multimode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
1420 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connectors
1421 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connector
1422 9 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable singlemode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
These optional features provide one Fibre Channel cable to connect a Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a server or fabric component port.
Each cable has a LC connector for attachment to the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port. The cables are available with a LC connector for attachment to the server or fabric component port.
The 50 micron cables (#141x features) are compatible with short-wave Fibre Channel/FICON host adapters (features #3153, #3157, and #3353).
The 9 micron cables (#142x features) are compatible with long-wave Fibre Channel/FICON adapters (features #3253, #3257, and #3453).
Features #1412 and #1422 provide a pigtail conversion cable that can be used to attach the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a cable with a LC connector.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: See description above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1450) 40m zHyperlink cable
This features provides one zHyperlink cable to connect a zHyperlink adapter port to a server or port of the zHyperLink Express feature (#0431 in IBM z14). It is a single 24-fiber cable with Multi-fiber Termination Push-on (MTP) connectors. Internally, the cable houses 12 fibers for transmit and 12 fibers for receive. The specifications of the cable are: 40 m, OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 2.0 GHz-km at 850 nm.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires feature #3500 (zHyperlink adapter) to be present in the system
- Limitations: 40 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: None
(#1451) 150m zHyperlink cable
This features provides one zHyperlink cable to connect a zHyperlink adapter port to a server or port of the zHyperLink Express feature (#0431 in IBM z14). It is a single 24-fiber cable with Multi-fiber Termination Push-on (MTP) connectors. Internally, the cable houses 12 fibers for transmit and 12 fibers for receive. The specifications of the cable are: 150 m, OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 4.7 GHz-km at 850 nm.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires feature# 3500 (zHyperlink adapter) to be present in the system
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: None
(#1600) High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 1600 High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of 4U (4 EIA) flash enclosures pair used to support flash card. Each enclosure pair will be populated with 48 cards.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#161x) Flash card sets
(#1610) 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------- 1610 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1611 800 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1612 1600 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1613 3200 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1623 3.8 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1622 1.92 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1624 7.68 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1625 15.36 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash
These features provide a set of 16 flash cards.
Flash cards are installed in a flash enclosure pair (feature #1602). Each flash enclosure pair can support up to three flash drive sets (up to 48 flash drives). All the flash cards installed within a storage system can be intermixed with different capacity.
Every flash enclosure pair must be populated with either three flash card sets (features #161x), a combination of one flash card set and two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699), or a combination of two flash card sets and one flash enclosure filler set (feature #1699). If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the feature must be removed as #161x features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed flash cards when purchasing new flash card of a higher capacity. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The flash cards feature numbers 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1623 can be configured as RAID 5, 6, or 10. The flash card feature number 1622, 1624 and 1625 can be configured as RAID 6 only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, 1623: Three
- Feature 1622, 1624, 1625: Six at system level (Initial order maximum: Three)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1602 and #1699 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Feature #1624 requires feature #1884 (LMC R8.4) to be ordered
- Features #1622 and #1625 requires feature #1885 (LMC R8.5) to be ordered
- Limitations: Cannot intermix different capacity within an enclosure pair. Systems with 512 GB of processor memory or less can support up to 512 TiB of raw capacity with small extents or up to 2 PiB of raw capacity with large extents. Systems with 1 TB of processor memory or more can support up to 2 PB of raw capacity with small extents or up to 8 PiB of raw capacity with large extents.
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1699) Flash enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 flash enclosure fillers. If a flash enclosure pair (feature #1600) is populated with only 16 flash cards (one #161x feature), it must be populated with two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699).
If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the #1699 feature must be removed as #161x features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#188X) DS8000 LMC R8.X
(#1882) DS8000 LMC R8.2
(No longer available as of November 21, 2018)
(#1883) DS8000 LMC R8.3
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
(#1884) DS8000 LMC R8.4
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
Feature Description ------- --------------- 1882 DS8000 LMC R8.2 1883 DS8000 LMC R8.3 1884 DS8000 LMC R8.4 1885 DS8000 LMC R8.5
These features provide DS8000 Licensed Machine Code (LMC) R8.x corresponding to the appropriate bundle family.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install/field install:
- For feature #1882, #1883: Field only
- For feature #1884, #1885: Both
(#1906) Earthquake kit
This feature provides an optional seismic kit for stabilizing the storage unit rack, so that the rack complies with IBM earthquake resistance standards. It is important for computer systems to be adequately restrained during earthquakes. This helps to prevent human injury. It also ensures that the system will be available following the earthquake by limiting potential damage to critical system components such as hard drives.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1999) Hardware Installation MES
Feature Description ------- ------------------------- 1999 Hardware Installation MES
This feature provides IBM trained personnel to perform the hardware installation.
- Minimum required: One per hardware field install order
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Must be attached to any hardware field install order. This includes features #16xx, #3xxx, #4xxx, #5xxx, and #6xxx.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#2997) 3.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of eight disk enclosure fillers. If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1244) is populated with only eight disk drives (one #58x8 or #58x9 feature), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2997, the #2997 feature must be removed as #58x8 or #58x9 features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 8
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#2999) 2.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 disk enclosure fillers.
If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241) is populated with only 16 disk drives (one #5xx8 - except #58xx features), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the #2999 feature must be removed as features #5xx8 (except #58xx features) are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 8
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant / field install: Both
(#3053) Device adapter pair I
Feature Description ------- --------------------- 3053 Device adapter pair I
This feature provides two device adapters. Device adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure pair (one device adapter pair in each I/O enclosure). An I/O enclosure pair can support up to two device adapter pairs.
The required quantity of this feature is based upon only the number of disk enclosure pair features #1241 that are present within Model 984, and if present, Model 84E expansion units attached to Model 984 (identified using features #0241 and #0242).
Since the third Model 84E do not support I/O enclosure pairs, the device adapters for disk enclosures installed within the second Model 84E must be ordered on and installed within Model 984.
Refer to the table below to determine the required quantity of feature #3053.
With feature #4421:
Model Model
984 984
#1241 required
quantity #3053
quantity
-------- --------
1-4 1
Note: Device adapters for disk enclosures (identified using feature #0241) are ordered on and installed could be on Model 984 or Model 84E. Therefore, the feature #1241 quantity within the first Model 84E could be applicable for determining the required quantity of feature #3053 in Model 984.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#315x, #325x, #335x) Fibre Channel/FICON adapter PCIe
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 3153 8 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3157 8 Gb 8 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3253 8 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3257 8 Gb 8 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3353 16 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3453 16 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe
These features provide one either four or eight-port Fibre Channel/FICON host adapter. Host adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure. An I/O enclosure pair can support up to eight host adapters. For higher availability, it is recommended that adapters always be added in pairs and in a balanced manner across the machine.
Each adapter supports:
- Four or eight ports, each with a full duplex transfer rate at 1600 MB, 800 MB, 400 MB, or 200 MB per second
- SCSI-FCP ULP (Upper Layer Protocol) on point-to-point, fabric, and arbitrated loop (private loop) topologies
- FICON ULP on point-to-point and fabric topologies
Note: SCSI-FCP and FICON are not supported simultaneously on the same port.
Note: FC-AL Topology is not supported on 16GFC adapters.
Cables for connecting an adapter port to a server or fabric port can be purchased using the #141x and #142x features.
Feature #315x and #3353 are supported with 50 micron multimode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC connector.
Feature #325x and #3453 are supported with 9 micron single mode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC.
Feature conversions are available to exchange installed adapters when purchasing new adapters of a different type. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The combination of four ports and eight ports of host adapter cards cannot exceed 32 ports on the base model.
- Minimum required: None. A minimum of two #3153, #3253, #3157, #3257, #3353, or #3453 features of the same type are required.
- Maximum allowed per Model 984:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: Eight
- Any combination of features #3157, or #3257: Four
- Maximum allowed per multi-model system:
- Model 984 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: 16
- Any combination of features #3157, or #3257: Eight
- Model 984 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#3500) zHyperlink adapter
This feature provides a one port zHyperlink adapter which resides in the PCIe G3 I/O drawer of the DS8880 and supports direct connectivity to IBM Z at distances up to 150 m.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 4 per system (Base and expansion frames) (Initial order maximum: 4 (1 or 3 cannot be ordered))
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires features #1303, #4425, and LMC R8.3 (feature #1883) or higher. FICON connectivity to each IBM z14 connected via zHyperLinks.
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration. This feature can only be ordered in quantities of 2 or 4
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: zHyperlink is not available on configurations with 6-cores. Features #1450 and #1451 are optional cables for this feature. Cabling might be provided by the customer.
(#3600) Transparent cloud tiering 10Gb/1Gb ethernet pair for 2U controllers
This feature provides a pair of 2-port 10 Gbps SFP+ optical / 2-port 1Gbps RJ-45 copper longwave adapters (one for each one of the 2U central electronics complexes) to improve bandwidth for a native cloud storage tier in IBM Z environments.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires LMC R8.3 (Feature #1883) or higher
- Limitations: 10 km maximum distance
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#4xxx) Processor memory
Feature Description ------- ----------------------- 4223 64 GB processor memory 4224 128 GB processor memory 4225 256 GB processor memory
Each feature designates the amount of processor memory installed in the machine.
Processor memory upgrades are processed as a feature conversion transaction. The transaction is invoiced at the differential price between the features removed and added.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Either features #4223, #4224, or #4225 require #4421 processor license feature
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field
(#4xxx) Processor memory
Feature Description ------- ----------------------- 4233 64 GB processor memory 4234 128 GB processor memory 4235 256 GB processor memory
Each feature designates the amount of processor memory installed in the machine.
Processor memory upgrades are processed as a feature conversion transaction. The transaction is invoiced at the differential price between the features removed and added.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Either features #4233, #4234, or #4235 require #4421 processor license feature. Require feature #1883.
- Limitations: No intermix of feature #422x with #423x
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#442x) Processor license indicators
Feature Description ------- ---------------------------------- 4421 6-core processor license indicator
This feature provides a processor card corresponding to the appropriate system.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #4421 requires either #4223, #4224, or #4225 processor memory feature
- Limitations: Either feature #4424 or #4425, are required to support feature #024x (expansion frame positions)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#4425) 6 to 12 Core processor upgrade
This feature provides an additional 6 Core processor for a 12 Core configuration. This additional processor is available in new orders and as a field upgrade. It is required to have zHyperlink support.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires feature #4421 (6-core processor), 256 GB cache (features #4225 or #4235), zSynergy Services activated (feature #8300), and LMC R8.3.3 (feature #1883) or higher
- Limitations: This feature is only required to support zHyperlink. If there are no zHyperlink adapters (feature #3500) in the order, this feature should be removed from the order
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: If this feature is selected, a minimum of 2 x #3500 (zHyperlink adapter) have to be added. Not available on Open environments.
(#5xx8) Disk drive sets
(#5308) 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5618) 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5868) 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
(No Longer Available as of November 22, 2017)
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 5308 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5618 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5708 600 GB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5768 1.2 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5778 1.8 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5868 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set 5878 6 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
These features provide a set of 16 disk drives, except features #58x8 which provide a set of eight disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241), except 4 TB disk drives which are installed in a 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair (features #12x4). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). Each 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair can support up to 24 disk drives. All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be the same type and same capacity.
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #5xx8), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999 or #2997), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999 or #2997). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999 or #2997, the feature must be removed as #5xx8 features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 12
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1242 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Features #1244 and #2997 may be required for features #58x8
- Limitations: No intermix between #5xxx and #6xxx features within an enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#6x58) SSD drive sets
(#6158) 400 GB SSD drive set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- -------------------- 6158 400 GB SSD drive set 6258 800 GB SSD drive set 6358 1.6 TB SSD drive set
Features #6x58 provide a set of 16 disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity).
With disk drive sets (16 drives per set), every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #6x58), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the feature must be removed as features #6x58 are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 12
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1245 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Limitations: All SSD drives installed within a disk enclosure must be of the same capacity type (features #6xxx)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#AGAA) Shipping and Handling - Model 984
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates each Model 984 on the order will have a
shipping and handling charge added to the order.
Note: Select either feature #AGAA or feature #AG00 on
the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
Chargeable features for Model 84E
(#1014) - Front & rear door lock kit
This feature code provides two sets of lock/keys (one for the front door, one for the rear door).
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 0)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Both
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#1050) Single Phase DC-UPS
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature provides the primary source of power for the storage system.
- Minimum required: Two
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#1055) Extended PLD
This optional feature provides extended protection from a power line disturbance (PLD).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: If feature #1055 is selected, it must be selected for all units in the 283x system. A 283x system is defined as the 283x base unit and all physically attached 283x expansion units.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#10xx) Single phase line cords
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------------------------------- 1062 SPP cord, 200-240V, 60A, IEC 60309 3-pin customer connector 1063 SPP cord, 200-240V, 63A, no customer connector provided
These features are used to specify a single phase power configuration.
These features provide two single phase power cords to supply external power to the machine and also can be used to order replacement line cords. These features also cover the top exit power cord and the cable you order is meant for top exit. Order feature code #1101 for the overhead ladder.
- Minimum required: One per feature number (select either feature #1062 or #1063)
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: The same power cord feature number is required on both Models 984 and 84E. Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1062 and #1063
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1242) HD STD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------- 1242 HD STD enclosure indicator
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the small form factor on the enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Five if feature #0241 exists and Seven if feature #0242 exists
- Corequisites: Each #1242 feature requires one #5xxx feature. One of these features must be feature #5xx8 (excluding #58x8 features).
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a STD disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- #5xx8 features (excluding #58x8 features) can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1244) 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1244 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
This feature notifies manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 3.5-inch spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the large form factor on the enclosure pair.
A 3.5-inch disk enclosure (feature #1244) supports up to 24 disk drives. The 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair is populated with either 8, 16, or 24 disk drives (features #58x8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 8 or 16 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Five if feature #0241 exists and seven if feature #0242 exists
- Corequisites: Each #1244 feature requires one #58x8 feature
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a 3.5-inch disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- The #58x8 features can be installed within the same 3.5-inch disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#126x) BC Disk drive cables
Feature Description Corequisite ------- ------------------------------------ ------------- 1262 BC Disk drive cable group B Feature #0241 1263 BC Disk drive cable group C Feature #0242 1266 Extended BC Disk drive cable group C Feature #0242
These features provide a complete set of Fibre Channel cables to connect all the disk drives (supported within the model) to their appropriate device adapters.
Selection of the appropriate feature is dependent upon the Model 8xE physical position (relative to the base unit) and base unit model number. The Model 984 indicator features (#02xx) are used to ensure the selection of the proper disk drive cable group feature.
If the Model 984 physical position (relative to the base unit) or the base unit model number is changed, a new disk drive cable group feature is required. A new disk drive cable group is obtained by ordering a feature remove of the installed #124x feature and a feature add of a new 124x feature.
The Extended Disk drive cable is meant for expansion frame place on adjacent position. The length is 20 meters.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations:
- If feature #0241 is ordered, the maximum drives supported is 240
- If feature #0242 is ordered, the maximum drives supported is 336
- Change from feature #1266 to #1263 is not allowed
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1303) I/O enclosure pair PCIe G3
This feature provides two I/O enclosures. An I/O enclosure pair supports up to two device adapter pairs, four PCIe connection to support the flash enclosure, and up to eight host adapters.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One if either feature #1241 quantity is five, feature #1600 quantity is one, or features #3x5x quantity is one and above on the first expansion frame.
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Feature #1303 is not compatible with feature #0242
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1400) Top exit bracket
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 1400 Top exit bracket for Fibre cable
This feature provides the bracket to secure the Fibre cables and power line cords routed to the top of the system.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1400
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#141x - 142x) Fibre Channel/FICON cables
Feature Description
------- ----------------------------------------------------------------
1410 50 micron, 40 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connectors
1411 50 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connector
1412 50 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable multimode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
1420 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connectors
1421 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connector
1422 9 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable singlemode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
These optional features provide one Fibre Channel cable to connect a Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a server or fabric component port.
Each cable has a LC connector for attachment to the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port. The cables are available with a LC connector for attachment to the server or fabric component port.
The 50 micron cables (#141x features) are compatible with short-wave Fibre Channel/FICON host adapters (feature #3153, #3157, and #3353).
The 9 micron cables (#142x features) are compatible with long-wave Fibre Channel/FICON adapters (feature #3253, #3257, and #3453).
Features #1412 and #1422 provide a pigtail conversion cable that can be used to attach the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a cable with a LC connector.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: See description above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1450) 40m zHyperlink cable
This features provides one zHyperlink cable to connect a zHyperlink adapter port to a server or port of the zHyperLink Express feature (#0431 in IBM z14). It is a single 24-fiber cable with Multi-fiber Termination Push-on (MTP) connectors. Internally, the cable houses 12 fibers for transmit and 12 fibers for receive. The specifications of the cable are: 40 m, OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 2.0 GHz-km at 850 nm.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires feature# 3500 (zHyperlink adapter) to be present in the system
- Limitations: 40 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration. Not available to order on feature #0377 (Second expansion frame).
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: None
(#1451) 150m zHyperlink cable
This features provides one zHyperlink cable to connect a zHyperlink adapter port to a server or port of the zHyperLink Express feature (#0431 in IBM z14). It is a single 24-fiber cable with Multi-fiber Termination Push-on (MTP) connectors. Internally, the cable houses 12 fibers for transmit and 12 fibers for receive. The specifications of the cable are: 150 m, OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 4.7 GHz-km at 850 nm.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires feature #3500 (zHyperlink adapter) to be present in the system
- Limitations: 150m maximum distance in a point to point configuration. Not available to order on feature #0377 (Second expansion frame).
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: None
(#1600) High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 1600 High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of 4U (4 EIA) flash enclosures pair used to support flash card. Each enclosure pair will be populated with 48 cards.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Support for the first expansion frame only (feature #0241)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#161x) Flash card sets
(#1610) 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------- 1610 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1611 800 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1612 1600 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1613 3200 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1623 3.8 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1622 1.92 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1624 7.68 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1625 15.36 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash
These features provide a set of 16 flash cards.
Flash cards are installed in a flash enclosure pair (feature #1602). Each flash enclosure pair can support up to three flash drive sets (up to 48 flash drives). All the flash cards installed within a storage system can be intermixed with different capacity.
Every flash enclosure pair must be populated with either three flash card sets (features #161x), a combination of one flash card set and two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699), or a combination of two flash card sets and one flash enclosure filler set (feature #1699). If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the feature must be removed as #161x features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed flash cards when purchasing new flash card of a higher capacity. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The flash cards feature numbers 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1623 can be configured as RAID 5, 6, or 10. The flash card feature number 1622, 1624 and 1625 can be configured as RAID 6 only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, 1623: Three
- Feature 1622, 1624, 1625: Six at system level (Initial order maximum: Three)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1602 and #1699 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Feature #1624 requires feature #1884 (LMC R8.4) to be ordered
- Features #1622 and #1625 requires feature #1885 (LMC R8.5) to be ordered
- Limitations: Cannot intermix different capacity within an enclosure pair. Systems with 512 GB of processor memory or less can support up to 512 TiB of raw capacity with small extents or up to 2 PiB of raw capacity with large extents. Systems with 1 TB of processor memory or more can support up to 2 PB of raw capacity with small extents or up to 8 PiB of raw capacity with large extents.
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1699) Flash enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 flash enclosure fillers. If a flash enclosure pair (feature #1600) is populated with only 16 flash cards (one #161x feature), it must be populated with two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699).
If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the #1699 feature must be removed as #161x features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1906) Earthquake kit
This feature provides an optional seismic kit for stabilizing the storage unit rack, so that the rack complies with IBM earthquake resistance standards. It is important for computer systems to be adequately restrained during earthquakes. This helps to prevent human injury. It also ensures that the system will be available following the earthquake by limiting potential damage to critical system components such as hard drives.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1999) Hardware Installation MES
Feature Description ------- ------------------------- 1999 Hardware Installation MES
This feature provides IBM trained personnel to perform the hardware installation.
- Minimum required: One per hardware field install order
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Must be attached to any hardware field install order. This includes features #16xx, #3xxx, #4xxx, #5xxx, and #6xxx.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#2997) 3.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of eight disk enclosure fillers. If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1244) is populated with only eight disk drives (one #58x8 feature), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2997, the #2997 feature must be removed as #58x8 features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Ten if feature #0241 is ordered and fourteen if feature #0242 is ordered
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#2999) 2.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 disk enclosure fillers.
If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241) is populated with only 16 disk drives (one #5xx8 - except #58xx features), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the #2999 feature must be removed as features #5xx8 (except #58xx features) are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Ten if feature #0241 is ordered and fourteen if feature #0242 is ordered
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant / field install: Both
(#3053) Device adapter pair I
Feature Description ------- --------------------- 3053 Device adapter pair I
This feature provides two device adapters. Device adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure pair (one device adapter pair in each I/O enclosure). An I/O enclosure pair can support up to two device adapter pairs.
This feature is only supported on the first Model 84E attached to a Model 984 (identified using feature #0241).
The required quantity of this feature is based upon only the number of disk enclosure pair features present in the first Model 84E.
Refer to the table below to determine the required quantity of feature #3053.
Model Model Model Model 84E with 84E with 84E 984 #0242 - #0241 - required required #1241 #1241 #3053 #3053 quantity quantity quantity quantity -------- -------- -------- -------- - 1-4 - 1 + 1 1-3 5 1 1 + 1 4-7 2 -
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: One #1303 feature is required for up to two #3053 features
- Limitations: Feature #3053 is not compatible with feature #0242
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#315x, #325x, #335x) Fibre Channel/FICON adapter PCIe
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 3153 8 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3157 8 Gb 8 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3253 8 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3257 8 Gb 8 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3353 16 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3453 16 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe
These features provide one either four or eight-port Fibre Channel/FICON host adapter. Host adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure. An I/O enclosure pair can support up to eight host adapters. For higher availability, it is recommended that adapters always be added in pairs and in a balanced manner across the machine.
Each adapter supports:
- Four or eight ports, each with a full duplex transfer rate at 1600 MB, 800 MB, 400 MB, or 200 MB per second
- SCSI-FCP ULP (Upper Layer Protocol) on point-to-point, fabric, and arbitrated loop (private loop) topologies
- FICON ULP on point-to-point and fabric topologies
Note: SCSI-FCP and FICON are not supported simultaneously on the same port.
Note: FC-AL Topology is not supported on 16GFC adapters.
Cables for connecting an adapter port to a server or fabric port can be purchased using the #141x and #142x features.
Features #315x and #3353 are supported with 50 micron multimode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC connector.
Features #325x and #3453 are supported with 9 micron single mode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC.
Feature conversions are available to exchange installed adapters when purchasing new adapters of a different type. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The combination of four ports and eight ports of host adapter cards cannot exceed 32 ports on the expansion model.
- Minimum required: None.
- Maximum allowed per Model 84E:
- Model 84E with feature #0241 and any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: Eight
- Any combination of features #3157, or #3257: Four
- Model 84E with feature #0242: None
- Maximum allowed per multi-model system: 16
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Features #3153, #3157, #3253, #3257, #3353, and #3453 are not compatible with features #0242.
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#3500) zHyperlink adapter
This feature provides a one port zHyperlink adapter which resides in the PCIe G3 I/O drawer of the DS8880 and supports direct connectivity to IBM Z at distances up to 150 m.
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 4 per system (Base and expansion frames) (Initial order maximum: 4 (1 or 3 cannot be ordered))
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires features #1303 and LMC R8.3 (feature #1883) or higher. FICON connectivity to each IBM z14 connected via zHyperLinks.
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration. This feature can only be ordered in quantities of 2 or 4
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Cable order: Features #1450 and #1451 are optional cables for this feature. Cabling might be provided by the customer.
- Comments: zHyperlink is not available on configurations with 6-cores
(#5xx8) Disk drive sets
(#5308) 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5618) 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5868) 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
(No Longer Available as of November 22, 2017)
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 5308 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5618 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5708 600 GB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5768 1.2 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5778 1.8 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5868 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set 5878 6 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
These features provide a set of 16 disk drives, except features #58x8 which provide a set of eight disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241), except 4 TB disk drives which are installed in a 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair (features #12x4). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). Each 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair can support up to 24 disk drives. All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be the same type and same capacity.
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #5xx8), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999 or #2997), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999 or #2997). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999 or #2997, the feature must be removed as #5xx8 features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Maximum quantity is 15 if feature #0241 is ordered
- Maximum quantity is 21 if feature #0242 is ordered
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1241 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Features #1244 and #2997 may be required for features #58x8
- Limitations: No intermix between #5xxx and #6xxx features within an enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#6x58) SSD drive sets
(#6158) 400 GB SSD drive set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- -------------------- 6158 400 GB SSD drive set 6258 800 GB SSD drive set 6358 1.6 TB SSD drive set
Features #6x58 provide a set of 16 disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature save1). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity).
With disk drive sets (16 drives per set), every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #6x58), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the feature must be removed as features #6x58 are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Maximum quantity is 15 if feature #0241 is ordered
- Maximum quantity is 21 if feature #0242 is ordered
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1245 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Limitations: All SSD drives installed within a disk enclosure must be of the same capacity type (features #6xxx)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#AGAB) Shipping and Handling - Model 84E
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates each Model 84E on the order will have a
shipping and handling charge added to the order.
Note: Select either feature #AGAB or feature #AG00 on
the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
Chargeable features for Model 985
(#0170) Top Expansion
This feature is used to indicate the base rack has exceed the 40U height and additional materials are required to support the top hat expansion.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Required if feature #1241 or #1602 quantity exceeds one
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1014) - Front & rear door lock kit
This feature code provides two sets of lock/keys (one for the front door, one for the rear door).
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 0)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Both
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#1050) Single Phase DC-UPS
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature provides the primary source of power for the storage system.
- Minimum required: Two
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: Either feature #1062 or #1063 must be selected
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#1055) Extended PLD
This optional feature provides extended protection from a power line disturbance (PLD).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: If feature #1055 is selected, it must be selected for all units in the 2834 system. The 2834 system is defined as the 2834 base unit and all physically attached 2834 expansion units.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#10xx) Single phase line cords
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------------------------------- 1062 SPP cord, 200-240V, 60A, IEC 60309 3-pin customer connector 1063 SPP cord, 200-240V, 63A, no customer connector provided
These features are used to specify a single phase power configuration.
These features provide two single phase power cords to supply external power to the machine and also can be used to order replacement line cords. These features also cover the top exit power cord and the cable you order is meant for top exit. Order feature code #1101 for the overhead ladder.
- Minimum required: One per feature number (select either feature #1062 or #1063)
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1062 and #1063
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1101) Overhead ladder - 5-feet
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1101 Overhead ladder - 5-feet
One overhead ladder is recommended per data center. This feature is required for top exit installation of power cords and Fibre Channel cables.
- Minimum: None
- Maximum: One recommended per customer site. Can be deselected if desired.
- Corequisites: Any of these features #1062, #1063, and/or #1400 may be required
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1102) Ladder - Top Expansion - 3-feet
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1102 Overhead ladder - 3-feet
One ladder is recommended per data center. This feature is required for installation of additional materials to expand the 40U to 46U top expansion.
- Minimum: None
- Maximum: One recommended per customer site. Can be deselected if desired.
- Corequisites: Feature #0170 will be required
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1103) Kick Step
Feature Description ------- ----------- 1103 Kick Step
One kick Step is recommended per data center. This feature is required for service/installation of High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2.
- Minimum: None
- Maximum: One recommended per customer site. Can be deselected if desired.
- Corequisites: Feature #1600 is required
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1140, #1150) Management console
(No longer available as of November 21, 2018)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1140 Mgmt console - Primary 1150 Mgmt console - Secondary
These features provide a dedicated PC consisting of a processor, keyboard, and display. The management console is used for machine configuration, management, and service activities, including call home and remote support.
Feature #1140 provides a management console that is installed (physically located) inside the machine. This feature is required.
Feature #1150 provides a secondary management console for mounting into model 985 system rack. The PC will share the existing keyboard and display with the primary management console. When used in accordance with IBM's associated documentation, this feature is capable of satisfying the applicable requirements of Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act, provided that any assistive technology used with the product properly interoperates with it.
Feature #1150 can also be used as a redundant management console for environments with high availability requirements. To help preserve console functionality, the management console is not available as a general purpose computing resource.
- Minimum required:
- Feature #1140: One. User is allowed to deselect this feature to select feature #1141
- Feature #1150: One. User is allowed to deselect this feature if required.
- Maximum allowed: One per feature number
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Feature #1150 can only be added to configurations with feature #1140 already selected
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only for feature #1140. Feature #1150 is plant and field install.
- Comments: Quantity one of feature #1140 or #1141 is required. Feature #1140 is the default.
(#1141) Management console - Primary v2
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature provides a dedicated PC consisting of a processor, keyboard, and display that is used for machine configuration, management, and service activities, including call home and remote support.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
- Comments: Quantity 1 of feature #1140 or #1141 is required
(#1151) Management console - Secondary v2
This feature provides a secondary management console for mounting into the system rack. The PC will share the existing keyboard and display with the primary management console and can be used as a redundant management console for environments with high availability requirements.
- Minimum required: 0 (1 if copy services feature #82xx is selected)
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Feature #1151 can only be added to configurations with feature #1141 already present
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: User is allowed to deselect this feature if required
(#1242) HD STD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------- 1242 HD STD enclosure indicator
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the small form factor on the enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Three
- Corequisites: Each #1242 feature requires one #5xxx feature. One of these features must be feature #5xx8 (excluding #58x8 features).
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a STD disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- #5xx8 features (excluding #58x8 features) can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1244) 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1244 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 3.5-inch spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for large form factor enclosure pair.
A 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair (feature #1244) supports up to 24 disk drives. The 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair is populated with either 8, 16, or 24 disk drives (features #58x8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 8 or 16 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Three
- Corequisites: Each #1244 feature requires one #58x8 feature
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a 3.5-inch disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- The #58x8 features can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1246) Disk drive cables
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1246 Disk drive cable group A
This feature provides a complete set of Fibre Channel cables to connect all the disk drives (supported within the model) to their appropriate device adapters.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#1303) I/O enclosure pair PCIe G3
This feature provides two I/O enclosures. An I/O enclosure pair supports up to two device adapter pairs, four PCIe connection to support the flash enclosure, and up to eight host adapters.
- Minimum required: One if feature #1600 is present in quantity of one
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#132x) I/O cables
Feature Description Corequisite ------- ------------------ -------------------- 1320 PCIe cable group 1 None 1321 PCIe cable group 2 Two of feature #1303
These features provide a complete set of PCIe interconnection cables.
- Minimum required: One, either feature #1320 or #1321
- Maximum allowed: One, either feature #1320 or #1321
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1400) Top exit bracket
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 1400 Top exit bracket for Fibre cable
This feature provides the bracket to secure the Fibre cables and power line cords routed to the top of the system.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1400
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#141x - 142x) Fibre Channel/FICON cables
Feature Description
------- ----------------------------------------------------------------
1410 50 micron, 40 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connectors
1411 50 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connector
1412 50 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable multimode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
1420 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connectors
1421 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connector
1422 9 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable singlemode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
These optional features provide one Fibre Channel cable to connect a Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a server or fabric component port.
Each cable has a LC connector for attachment to the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port. The cables are available with a LC connector for attachment to the server or fabric component port.
The 50 micron cables (#141x features) are compatible with short-wave Fibre Channel/FICON host adapters (features #3153, #3157, and #3353).
The 9 micron cables (#142x features) are compatible with long-wave Fibre Channel/FICON adapters (features #3253, #3257, and #3453).
Features #1412 and #1422 provide a pigtail conversion cable that can be used to attach the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a cable with a LC connector.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: See description above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#145x) zHyperlink cable
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1450 40m zHyperlink cable 1451 150m zHyperlink cable
These optional features provide one zHyperlink cable to connect a zHyperlink adapter port to a server or port of the zHyperLink Express feature (#0431 in IBM z14).
Each cable is a single 24-fiber cable with Multi-fiber Termination Push-on (MTP) connectors. Internally, the single cable houses 12 fibers for transmit and 12 fibers for receive.
Two fiber type options are available with specifications supporting different distances for the zHyperLink Express:
- 150 m: OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 4.7 GHz-km at 850 nm
- 40 m: OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 2.0 GHz-km at 850 nm
- Minimum required: Zero
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites:
- Either features #1450 or #1451 require #3500 zHyperlink adapter
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1600) High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 1600 High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of 4U (4 EIA) flash enclosures pair used to support flash card. Each enclosure pair will be populated with 48 cards.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#161x) Flash card sets
(#1610) 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------- 1610 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1611 800 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1612 1600 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1613 3200 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1623 3.8 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1624 7.68 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1625 15.36 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash
These features provide a set of 16 flash cards.
Flash cards are installed in a flash enclosure pair (feature #1602). Each flash enclosure pair can support up to three flash drive sets (up to 48 flash drives). All the flash cards installed within a storage system can be intermixed with different capacity.
Every flash enclosure pair must be populated with either three flash card sets (features #161x), a combination of one flash card set and two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699), or a combination of two flash card sets and one flash enclosure filler set (feature #1699). If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the feature must be removed as #161x features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed flash cards when purchasing new flash card of a higher capacity. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The flash cards feature numbers 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1623 can be configured as RAID 5, 6, or 10. The flash card feature number 1624 and 1625 can be configured as RAID 6 only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, 1623: Six
- Feature 1624, 1625: 12 at system level (Initial order maximum: Six)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1602 and #1699 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Feature #1624 requires feature #1884 (LMC R8.4) to be ordered
- Feature #1625 requires feature #1885 (LMC R8.5) to be ordered
- Limitations: Cannot intermix different capacity within an enclosure pair. Systems with 512 GB of processor memory or less can support up to 512 TiB of formatted physical capacity with small extents or up to 2 PiB of formatted physical capacity with large extents. Systems with 1 TB of processor memory or more can support up to 2 PB of formatted physical capacity with small extents or up to 8 PiB of formatted physical capacity with large extents. The maximum Thin Provisioning capacity would be 2x the maximum formatted physical capacity.
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1699) Flash enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 flash enclosure fillers. If a flash enclosure pair (feature #1600) is populated with only 16 flash cards (one #161x feature), it must be populated with two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699).
If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the #1699 feature must be removed as #161x features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#188X) DS8000 LMC R8.X
(#1882) DS8000 LMC R8.2
(No longer available as of November 21, 2018)
(#1883) DS8000 LMC R8.3
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
(#1884) DS8000 LMC R8.4
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
Feature Description ------- --------------- 1882 DS8000 LMC R8.2 1883 DS8000 LMC R8.3 1884 DS8000 LMC R8.4 1885 DS8000 LMC R8.5
These features provide DS8000 Licensed Machine Code (LMC) R8.x corresponding to the appropriate bundle family.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install/field install:
- For feature #1882, #1883: Field only
- For feature #1884, #1885: Both
(#1906) Earthquake kit
This feature provides an optional seismic kit for stabilizing the storage unit rack, so that the rack complies with IBM earthquake resistance standards. It is important for computer systems to be adequately restrained during earthquakes. This helps to prevent human injury. It also ensures that the system will be available following the earthquake by limiting potential damage to critical system components such as hard drives.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1999) Hardware Installation MES
Feature Description ------- ------------------------- 1999 Hardware Installation MES
This feature provides IBM trained personnel to perform the hardware installation.
- Minimum required: One per hardware field install order
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Must be attached to any hardware field install order. This includes features #16xx, #3xxx, #4xxx, #5xxx, and #6xxx.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#2997) 3.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of eight disk enclosure fillers. If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1244) is populated with only eight disk drives (one #58x8 feature), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2997, the #2997 feature must be removed as #58x8 features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Six
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#2999) 2.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 disk enclosure fillers.
If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241) is populated with only 16 disk drives (one #5xx8 feature - except #58xx features), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the #2999 feature must be removed as features #5xx8 (except #58xx features) are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Six
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant / field install: Both
(#3053) Device adapter pair I
Feature Description ------- --------------------- 3053 Device adapter pair I
This feature provides two device adapters. Device adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure pair (one device adapter pair in each I/O enclosure). An I/O enclosure pair can support up to two device adapter pairs.
The required quantity of this feature is based upon only the number of disk enclosure pair features #1241 that are present within Model 985, and if present, Model 85E expansion units attached to Model 985 (identified using features #0241).
Since the third, fourth, and fifth Model 85E do not support I/O enclosure pairs, the device adapters for disk enclosures installed within the second Model 85E must be ordered on and installed within Model 985.
Refer to the table below to determine the required quantity of feature #3053.
With features #4422, #4423, or #4424:
Model Model
985 985
#1241 required
quantity #3053
quantity
-------- --------
1 1
2 2
3 3
Note: Device adapters for disk enclosures installed in the first Model 85E (identified using feature #0241) are ordered on and installed within that Model 85E. Therefore, the feature #1241 quantity within the first Model 85E is not applicable for determining the required quantity of feature #3053 in Model 985. The feature #1241 quantity 1 on the second Model 85E will determine the additional device adapter on model 985.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#315x, #325x, #335x) Fibre Channel/FICON adapter PCIe
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 3153 8 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3157 8 Gb 8 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3253 8 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3257 8 Gb 8 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3353 16 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3453 16 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe
These features provide one either four or eight-port Fibre Channel/FICON host adapter. Host adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure. An I/O enclosure pair can support up to 32 host adapter ports. To support more than 32 host adapter ports, additional I/O enclosure pairs are required. For higher availability, it is recommended that adapters always be added in pairs and in a balanced manner across the machine.
Each adapter supports:
- Four or eight ports, each with a full duplex transfer rate at 1600 MB, 800 MB, 400 MB, or 200 MB per second
- SCSI-FCP ULP (Upper Layer Protocol) on point-to-point, fabric, and arbitrated loop (private loop) topologies
- FICON ULP on point-to-point and fabric topologies
Note: SCSI-FCP and FICON are not supported simultaneously on the same port.
Note: FC-AL Topology is not supported on 16GFC adapters.
Cables for connecting an adapter port to a server or fabric port can be purchased using the #141x and #142x features.
Feature #315x and #3353 are supported with 50 micron multimode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC connector.
Feature #325x and #3453 are supported with 9 micron single mode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC.
Feature conversions are available to exchange installed adapters when purchasing new adapters of a different type. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The combination of four ports and eight ports of host adapter cards cannot exceed 64 ports on the base model.
- Minimum required: None. A minimum of two #3153, #3253, #3157, #3257, #3353, or #3453 features of the same type are required.
- Maximum allowed per Model 985:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: 16
- Any combination of features #3157 or #3257: Eight
- Maximum allowed per multi-model system:
- Model 985 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: 32
- Any combination of features #3157 or #3257: 16
- Model 985 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#3500) zHyperlink adapter
This feature provides a one port zHyperlink adapter which resides in the PCIe G3 I/O drawer of the DS8880 and supports direct connectivity to IBM Z at distances up to 150 m.
- Minimum required: Zero
- Maximum allowed: Zero when feature #4422 (8-core processor) is present. Eight per system (Base and expansion frames) when feature #4423 (16-Core processor) is present. Twelve per system (Base and expansion frames) when feature #4424 (24-Core processor) is present. (Initial order maximum: Eight - Feature #3500 cannot be ordered in quantities of 1, 3, 5, or 7)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires features #1303 and LMC R8.3 (feature #1883) or higher. FICON connectivity to each IBM z14 connected via zHyperLinks.
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration. This feature can only be ordered in quantities of 2, 4, 6, or 8.
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: None
(#3601) Transparent cloud tiering 10Gb/1Gb ethernet pair for 4U controllers
This feature provides a pair of 2-port 10 Gbps SFP+ optical / 2-port 1Gbps RJ-45 copper longwave adapters (one for each one of the 4U central electronics complexes) to improve bandwidth for a native cloud storage tier in IBM Z environments.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires LMC R8.3 (Feature #1883) or higher
- Limitations: 10 km maximum distance
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#4xxx) Processor memory
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------------ 4324 128 GB processor memory (8-core only) 4325 256 GB processor memory (8-core only or 16-core) 4326 512 GB processor memory (16-core only) 4327 1,024 GB Processor memory (24-core only) 4328 2,048 GB Processor memory (24-core only)
Each feature designates the amount of processor memory installed in the machine.
Processor memory upgrades are processed as a feature conversion transaction. The transaction is invoiced at the differential price between the features removed and added.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites:
- Either features #4324 or #4325 require #4422 processor license feature
- Either features #4325 or #4326 require #4423 processor license feature
- Either features #4327 or #4328 require #4424 processor license feature
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field
(#4xxx) Processor memory
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------------ 4334 128 GB processor memory (8-core only) 4335 256 GB processor memory (8-core only or 16-core) 4336 512 GB processor memory (16-core only) 4337 1,024 GB Processor memory (24-core only) 4338 2,048 GB Processor memory (24-core only)
Each feature designates the amount of processor memory installed in the machine.
Processor memory upgrades are processed as a feature conversion transaction. The transaction is invoiced at the differential price between the features removed and added.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites:
- Either features #4334 or #4335 require #4422 processor license feature
- Either features #4335 or #4336 require #4423 processor license feature
- Either features #4337 or #4338 require #4424 processor license feature
- Require feature #1883
- Limitations: No intermix of feature #432x with #433x
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#442x) Processor license indicators
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------- 4422 8-core processor license indicator 4423 16-core processor license indicator 4424 24-core processor license indicator
This feature provides a processor card corresponding to the appropriate system.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites:
- Features #4422 require either #4324 or #4325 processor memory feature
- Features #4423 require #4325 or #4326 processor memory feature
- Fatures #4424 require either #4327 or #4328 processor memory feature
- Limitations: Feature #4423 or #4424, is required to support feature #037x (expansion frame positions)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#5xx8) Disk drive sets
(#5308) 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5618) 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5868) 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
(No Longer Available as of November 22, 2017)
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 5308 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5618 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5708 600 GB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5768 1.2 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5778 1.8 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5868 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set 5878 6 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
These features provide a set of 16 disk drives, except features #58x8 which provide a set of eight disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241), except 4 TB disk drives which are installed in a 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair (features #12x4). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). Each 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair can support up to 24 disk drives. All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be the same type and same capacity.
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #5xx8), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999 or #2997), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999 or #2997). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999 or #2997, the feature must be removed as #5xx8 features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Nine
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1242 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Features #1244 and #2997 may be required for features #58x8
- Limitations: No intermix between #5xxx and #6xxx features within an enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#6x58) SSD drive sets
(#6158) 400 GB SSD drive set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- -------------------- 6158 400 GB SSD drive set 6258 800 GB SSD drive set 6358 1.6 TB SSD drive set
Features #6x58 provide a set of 16 disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity).
With disk drive sets (16 drives per set), every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #6x58), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the feature must be removed as features #6x58 are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Nine
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1245 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Limitations: All SSD drives installed within a disk enclosure must be of the same capacity type (features #6xxx)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#AGAC) Shipping and Handling - Model 985
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates each Model 985 on the order will have a
shipping and handling charge added to the order.
Note: Select either feature #AGAC or feature #AG00 on
the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
Chargeable features for Model 85E
(#0170) Top Expansion
This feature is used to indicate the expansion rack have exceed the 40U height. Additional materials are required to support the top hat expansion.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #1241 quantity exceeds three and eight for position 1 (feature #0241) and positions 2 and 3 (features #0242/#0243) respectively or feature #1602 quantity exceeds three or feature #0170 already exists on Model 985
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1014) - Front & rear door lock kit
This feature code provides two sets of lock/keys (one for the front door, one for the rear door).
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 0)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Both
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#1050) Single Phase DC-UPS
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature provides the primary source of power for the storage system.
- Minimum required: Two
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#1055) Extended PLD
This optional feature provides extended protection from a power line disturbance (PLD).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: If feature #1055 is selected, it must be selected for all units in the 283x system. A 283x system is defined as the 283x base unit and all physically attached 283x expansion units.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#10xx) Single phase line cords
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------------------------------- 1062 SPP cord, 200-240V, 60A, IEC 60309 3-pin customer connector 1063 SPP cord, 200-240V, 63A, no customer connector provided
These features are used to specify a single phase power configuration.
These features provide two single phase power cords to supply external power to the machine and also can be used to order replacement line cords. These features also cover the top exit power cord and the cable you order is meant for top exit. Order feature code #1101 for the overhead ladder.
- Minimum required: One per feature number (select either feature #1062 or #1063)
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: The same power cord feature number is required on both Models 985 and 85E. Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1062 and #1063
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1242) HD STD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------- 1242 HD STD enclosure indicator
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the small form factor on the enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Five if feature #0241 exists, nine if feature #0242 or #0243 exist, and six if feature #0244 exists
- Corequisites: Each #1242 feature requires one #5xxx feature. One of these features must be feature #5xx8 (excluding #58x8 features).
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a STD disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- #5xx8 features (excluding #58x8 features) can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1244) 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1244 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
This feature notifies manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 3.5-inch spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the large form factor on the enclosure pair.
A 3.5-inch disk enclosure (feature #1244) supports up to 24 disk drives. The 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair is populated with either 8, 16, or 24 disk drives (features #58x8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 8 or 16 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Five if feature #0241 exists, nine if feature #0242 or #0243 exist, and six if feature #0244 exists
- Corequisites: Each #1244 feature requires one #58x8 feature
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a 3.5-inch disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- The #58x8 features can be installed within the same 3.5-inch disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#124x) Disk drive cables
Feature Description Corequisite ------- --------------------------------- ------------- 1247 Disk drive cable group B Feature #0241 1248 Disk drive cable group C Feature #0242 1249 Disk drive cable group D Feature #0243 1251 Disk drive cable group E Feature #0244 1252 Extended Disk drive cable group C Feature #0242 1253 Extended Disk drive cable group D Feature #0243 1254 Extended Disk drive cable group E Feature #0244
These features provide a complete set of Fibre Channel cables to connect all the disk drives (supported within the model) to their appropriate device adapters.
Selection of the appropriate feature is dependent upon the Model 8xE physical position (relative to the base unit) and base unit model number. The Model 985 indicator features (#02xx) are used to ensure the selection of the proper disk drive cable group feature.
If the Model 985 physical position (relative to the base unit) or the base unit model number is changed, a new disk drive cable group feature is required. A new disk drive cable group is obtained by ordering a feature remove of the installed #124x feature and a feature add of a new 124x feature.
The Extended Disk drive cable is meant for expansion frame place on adjacent position. The length is 20 meters.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations:
- If feature #0241 is ordered, the maximum drives supported is 240
- If feature #0242 or #0243 are ordered, the maximum drives supported is 432
- If feature #0244 is ordered, the maximum drives supported is 288
- Change from feature #1252 to #1248 is not allowed
- Change from feature #1253 to #1249 is not allowed
- Change from feature #1254 to #1251 is not allowed
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1303) I/O enclosure pair PCIe G3
This feature provides two I/O enclosures. An I/O enclosure pair supports up to two device adapter pairs, four PCIe connection to support the flash enclosure, and up to eight host adapters.
- Minimum required: Two
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Feature #1303 is not compatible with feature #0242, #0243 or #0244
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1400) Top exit bracket
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 1400 Top exit bracket for Fibre cable
This feature provides the bracket to secure the Fibre cables and power line cords routed to the top of the system.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1400
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#141x - 142x) Fibre Channel/FICON cables
Feature Description
------- ----------------------------------------------------------------
1410 50 micron, 40 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connectors
1411 50 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connector
1412 50 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable multimode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
1420 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connectors
1421 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connector
1422 9 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable singlemode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
These optional features provide one Fibre Channel cable to connect a Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a server or fabric component port.
Each cable has a LC connector for attachment to the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port. The cables are available with a LC connector for attachment to the server or fabric component port.
The 50 micron cables (#141x features) are compatible with short-wave Fibre Channel/FICON host adapters (feature #3153, #3157, and #3353).
The 9 micron cables (#142x features) are compatible with long-wave Fibre Channel/FICON adapters (feature #3253, #3257, and #3453).
Features #1412 and #1422 provide a pigtail conversion cable that can be used to attach the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a cable with a LC connector.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: See description above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#145x) zHyperlink cable
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1450 40m zHyperlink cable 1451 150m zHyperlink cable
These optional features provide one zHyperlink cable to connect a zHyperlink adapter port to a server or port of the zHyperLink Express feature (#0431 in IBM z14).
Each cable is a single 24-fiber cable with Multi-fiber Termination Push-on (MTP) connectors. Internally, the single cable houses 12 fibers for transmit and 12 fibers for receive.
Two fiber type options are available with specifications supporting different distances for the zHyperLink Express:
- 150 m: OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 4.7 GHz-km at 850 nm
- 40 m: OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 2.0 GHz-km at 850 nm
- Minimum required: Zero
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites:
- Either features #1450 or #1451 require #3500 zHyperlink adapter
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1600) High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 1600 High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of 4U (4 EIA) flash enclosures pair used to support flash card. Each enclosure pair will be populated with 48 cards.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#161x) Flash card sets
(#1610) 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------- 1610 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1611 800 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1612 1600 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1613 3200 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1623 3.8 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1624 7.68 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1625 15.36 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash
These features provide a set of 16 flash cards.
Flash cards are installed in a flash enclosure pair (feature #1602). Each flash enclosure pair can support up to three flash drive sets (up to 48 flash drives). All the flash cards installed within a storage system can be intermixed with different capacity.
Every flash enclosure pair must be populated with either three flash card sets (features #161x), a combination of one flash card set and two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699), or a combination of two flash card sets and one flash enclosure filler set (feature #1699). If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the feature must be removed as #161x features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed flash cards when purchasing new flash card of a higher capacity. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The flash cards feature numbers 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1623 can be configured as RAID 5, 6, or 10. The flash card feature number 1624 and 1625 can be configured as RAID 6 only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, 1623: Six
- Feature 1624, 1625: 12 at system level (Initial order maximum: Six)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1602 and #1699 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Feature #1624 requires feature #1884 (LMC R8.4) to be ordered
- Feature #1625 requires feature #1885 (LMC R8.5) to be ordered
- Limitations: Cannot intermix different capacity within an enclosure pair. Systems with 512 GB of processor memory or less can support up to 512 TiB of formatted physical capacity with small extents or up to 2 PiB of formatted physical capacity with large extents. Systems with 1 TB of processor memory or more can support up to 2 PB of formatted physical capacity with small extents or up to 8 PiB of formatted physical capacity with large extents. The maximum Thin Provisioning capacity would be 2x the maximum formatted physical capacity.
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1699) Flash enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 flash enclosure fillers. If a flash enclosure pair (feature #1600) is populated with only 16 flash cards (one #161x feature), it must be populated with two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699).
If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the #1699 feature must be removed as #161x features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1906) Earthquake kit
This feature provides an optional seismic kit for stabilizing the storage unit rack, so that the rack complies with IBM earthquake resistance standards. It is important for computer systems to be adequately restrained during earthquakes. This helps to prevent human injury. It also ensures that the system will be available following the earthquake by limiting potential damage to critical system components such as hard drives.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1999) Hardware Installation MES
Feature Description ------- ------------------------- 1999 Hardware Installation MES
This feature provides IBM trained personnel to perform the hardware installation.
- Minimum required: One per hardware field install order
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Must be attached to any hardware field install order. This includes features #16xx, #3xxx, #4xxx, #5xxx, and #6xxx.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#2997) 3.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of eight disk enclosure fillers. If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1244) is populated with only eight disk drives (one #58x8 feature), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2997, the #2997 feature must be removed as #58x8 features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Ten if feature #0241 is ordered, eighteen if either feature #0242 or #0243 is ordered, and twelve if feature #0244 is ordered
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#2999) 2.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 disk enclosure fillers.
If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241) is populated with only 16 disk drives (one #5xx8 feature - except #58xx features), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the #2999 feature must be removed as features #5xx8 (except #58xx features) are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Ten if feature #0241 is ordered, eighteen if either feature #0242 or #0243 is ordered, and twelve if feature #0244 is ordered
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant / field install: Both
(#3053) Device adapter pair I
Feature Description ------- --------------------- 3053 Device adapter pair I
This feature provides two device adapters. Device adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure pair (one device adapter pair in each I/O enclosure). An I/O enclosure pair can support up to two device adapter pairs.
This feature is only supported on the first Model 85E attached to a Model 985 (identified using feature #0241).
The required quantity of this feature is based upon only the number of disk enclosure pair features present in the first Model 85E.
Refer to the table below to determine the required quantity of feature #3053.
Model Model
85E with 85E -
#0241 - Required
#1241 #3053
quantity quantity
-------- --------
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 4
Model Model
85E - 85E -
#3053 Required
quantity #1303
quantity
-------- --------
1-4 2
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: Two #1303 features are required for up to four #3053 features
- Limitations: Feature #3053 is not compatible with feature #0242, #0243, or #0244
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#315x, #325x, #335x) Fibre Channel/FICON adapter PCIe
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 3153 8 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3157 8 Gb 8 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3253 8 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3257 8 Gb 8 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3353 16 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3453 16 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe
These features provide one either four or eight-port Fibre Channel/FICON host adapter. Host adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure. An I/O enclosure pair can support up to 32 host adapters. To support more than 32 host adapter ports, additional I/O enclosure pairs are required. For higher availability, it is recommended that adapters always be added in pairs and in a balanced manner across the machine.
Each adapter supports:
- Four or eight ports, each with a full duplex transfer rate at 1600 MB, 800 MB, 400 MB, or 200 MB per second
- SCSI-FCP ULP (Upper Layer Protocol) on point-to-point, fabric, and arbitrated loop (private loop) topologies
- FICON ULP on point-to-point and fabric topologies
Note: SCSI-FCP and FICON are not supported simultaneously on the same port.
Note: FC-AL Topology is not supported on 16GFC adapters.
Cables for connecting an adapter port to a server or fabric port can be purchased using the #141x and #142x features.
Feature #315x and #3353 are supported with 50 micron multimode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC connector.
Feature #325x and #3453 are supported with 9 micron single mode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC.
Feature conversions are available to exchange installed adapters when purchasing new adapters of a different type. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The combination of four ports and eight ports of host adapter cards cannot exceed 64 ports on the base model.
- Minimum required: None. A minimum of two #3153, #3253, #3157, #3257, #3353, or #3453 features of the same type are required.
- Maximum allowed per Model 985:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: 16
- Any combination of features #3157, or #3257: Eight
- Maximum allowed per multi-model system:
- Model 985 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: 32
- Any combination of features #3157, or #3257: 16
- Model 985 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#3500) zHyperlink adapter
This feature provides a one port zHyperlink adapter which resides in the PCIe G3 I/O drawer of the DS8880 and supports direct connectivity to IBM Z at distances up to 150 m.
- Minimum required: Zero
- Maximum allowed: Zero when feature #4422 (8-core processor) is present. Eight per system (Base and expansion frames) when feature #4423 (16-Core processor) is present. Twelve per system (Base and expansion frames) when feature #4424 (24-Core processor) is present. (Initial order maximum: Eight - Feature #3500 cannot be ordered in quantities of 1, 3, 5, or 7)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires features #1303 and LMC R8.3 (feature #1883) or higher. FICON connectivity to each IBM z14 connected via zHyperLinks.
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration. This feature can only be ordered in quantities of 2, 4, 6, or 8.
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: None
(#5xx8) Disk drive sets
(#5308) 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5618) 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5868) 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
(No Longer Available as of November 22, 2017)
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 5308 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5618 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5708 600 GB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5768 1.2 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5778 1.8 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5868 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set 5878 6 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
These features provide a set of 16 disk drives, except features #58x8 which provide a set of eight disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241), except 4 TB disk drives which are installed in a 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair (features #12x4). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). Each 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair can support up to 24 disk drives. All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be the same type and same capacity.
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #5xx8), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999 or #2997), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999 or #2997). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999 or #2997, the feature must be removed as #5xx8 features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Maximum quantity is 15 if feature #0241 is ordered
- Maximum quantity is 27 if feature #0242 or #0243 are ordered
- Maximum quantity is 18 if feature #0244 is ordered
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1241 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Features #1244 and #2997 may be required for features #58x8
- Limitations: No intermix between #5xxx and #6xxx features within an enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#6x58) SSD drive sets
(#6158) 400 GB SSD drive set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- -------------------- 6158 400 GB SSD drive set 6258 800 GB SSD drive set 6358 1.6 TB SSD drive set
Features #6x58 provide a set of 16 disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity).
With disk drive sets (16 drives per set), every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #6x58), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the feature must be removed as features #6x58 are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Maximum quantity is 15 if feature #0241 is ordered
- Maximum quantity is 27 if feature #0242 or #0243 are ordered
- Maximum quantity is 18 if feature #0244 is ordered
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1245 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Limitations: All SSD drives installed within a disk enclosure must be of the same capacity type (features #6xxx)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#AGAD) Shipping and Handling - Model 85E
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates each Model 85E on the order will have a
shipping and handling charge added to the order.
Note: Select either feature #AGAD or feature #AG00 on
the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
Chargeable features for Model 986
(#0170) Top Expansion
This feature is used to indicate the base rack has exceed the 40U height and additional materials are required to support the top hat expansion.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Required if feature #1241 or #1602 quantity equal to one or more
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1014) - Front & rear door lock kit
This feature code provides two sets of lock/keys (one for the front door, one for the rear door).
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 0)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Both
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#1052) Three Phase DC-UPS
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature provides the primary source of power for the storage system.
- Minimum required: Two
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: Either feature #1086, #1087, #1088, or #1089 must be selected
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#1055) Extended PLD
This optional feature provides extended protection from a power line disturbance (PLD).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: If feature #1055 is selected, it must be selected for all units in the 2834 system. The 2834 system is defined as the 2834 base unit and all physically attached 2834 expansion units.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#10xx) Three phase line cords
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------------------ 1086 Three phase power cord, 380-415V, 30A, 5 pin connector 1087 Three phase power cord, 200-240V, 30A, 4 pin connector 1088 Three phase power cord, 380-415V, 40A, no connector 1089 Three phase power cord, 200-240V, 60A, 4 pin connector
These features are used to specify a three phase power configuration.
These features provide two three phase power cords to supply external power to the machine and also can be used to order replacement line cords. These features also cover the top exit power cord and the cable you order is meant for top exit. Order feature code #1101 for the overhead ladder.
- Minimum required: One per feature number (select either feature #1086, #1087, #1088, or #1089)
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for features #1086, #1087, #1088, and #1089.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1101) Overhead ladder - 5-feet
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1101 Overhead ladder - 5-feet
One overhead ladder is recommended per data center. This feature is required for top exit installation of power cords and Fibre Channel cables.
- Minimum: None
- Maximum: One recommended per customer site. Can be deselected if desired.
- Corequisites: Any of these features #1086, #1087, #1088, #1089, and/or #1400 may be required
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1102) Ladder - Top Expansion - 3-feet
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1102 Overhead ladder - 3-feet
One ladder is recommended per data center. This feature is required for installation of additional materials to expand the 40U to 46U top expansion.
- Minimum: None
- Maximum: One recommended per customer site. Can be deselected if desired.
- Corequisites: Feature #0170 will be required
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1103) Kick Step
Feature Description ------- ----------- 1103 Kick Step
One kick Step is recommended per data center. This feature is required for service/installation of High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2.
- Minimum: None
- Maximum: One recommended per customer site. Can be deselected if desired.
- Corequisites: Feature #1600 is required
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1140, #1150) Management console
(No longer available as of November 21, 2018)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1140 Mgmt console - Primary 1150 Mgmt console - Secondary
These features provide a dedicated PC consisting of a processor, keyboard, and display. The management console is used for machine configuration, management, and service activities, including call home and remote support.
Feature #1140 provides a management console that is installed (physically located) inside the machine. This feature is required.
Feature #1150 provides a secondary management console for mounting into model 986 system rack. The PC will share the existing keyboard and display with the primary management console. When used in accordance with IBM's associated documentation, this feature is capable of satisfying the applicable requirements of Section 508 of the Rehabilitation Act, provided that any assistive technology used with the product properly interoperates with it.
Feature #1150 can also be used as a redundant management console for environments with high availability requirements. To help preserve console functionality, the management console is not available as a general purpose computing resource.
- Minimum required:
- Feature #1140: One. User is allowed to deselect this feature to select feature #1141
- Feature #1150: One. User is allowed to deselect this feature if required.
- Maximum allowed: One per feature number
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Feature #1150 can only be added to configurations with feature #1140 already selected
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only for feature #1140. Feature #1150 is plant and field install.
- Comments: Quantity one of feature #1140 or #1141 is required. Feature #1140 is the default.
(#1141) Management console - Primary v2
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature provides a dedicated PC consisting of a processor, keyboard, and display that is used for machine configuration, management, and service activities, including call home and remote support.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
- Comments: Quantity 1 of feature #1140 or #1141 is required
(#1151) Management console - Secondary v2
This feature provides a secondary management console for mounting into the system rack. The PC will share the existing keyboard and display with the primary management console and can be used as a redundant management console for environments with high availability requirements.
- Minimum required: 0 (1 if copy services feature #82xx is selected)
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Feature #1151 can only be added to configurations with feature #1141 already present
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: User is allowed to deselect this feature if required
(#1242) HD STD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------- 1242 HD STD enclosure indicator
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the small form factor on the enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: Each #1242 feature requires one #5xxx feature. One of these features must be feature #5xx8 (excluding #58x8 features).
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a STD disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- #5xx8 features (excluding #58x8 features) can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1244) 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1244 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 3.5-inch spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the large form factor on the enclosure pair.
A 3.5-inch disk enclosure (feature #1244) supports up to 24 disk drives. The 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair is populated with either 8, 16, or 24 disk drives (features #58x8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 8 or 16 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: Each #1244 feature requires one #58x8 feature
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a 3.5-inch disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- The #58x8 features can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1246) Disk drive cables
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------ 1246 Disk drive cable group A
This feature provides a complete set of Fibre Channel cables to connect all the disk drives (supported within the model) to their appropriate device adapters.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant install only
(#1303) I/O enclosure pair PCIe G3
This feature provides two I/O enclosures. An I/O enclosure pair supports up to two device adapter pairs, four PCIe connection to support the flash enclosure, and up to eight host adapters.
- Minimum required: One if feature #1600 is present in quantity of one
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#132x) I/O cables
Feature Description Corequisite ------- ------------------ -------------------- 1320 PCIe cable group 1 None 1321 PCIe cable group 2 Two of feature #1303
These features provide a complete set of PCIe interconnection cables.
- Minimum required: One, either feature #1320 or #1321
- Maximum allowed: One, either feature #1320 or #1321
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1400) Top exit bracket
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 1400 Top exit bracket for Fibre cable
This feature provides the bracket to secure the Fibre cables and power line cords routed to the top of the system.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1400
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#141x - 142x) Fibre Channel/FICON cables
Feature Description
------- ----------------------------------------------------------------
1410 50 micron, 40 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connectors
1411 50 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connector
1412 50 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable multimode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
1420 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connectors
1421 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connector
1422 9 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable singlemode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
These optional features provide one Fibre Channel cable to connect a Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a server or fabric component port.
Each cable has a LC connector for attachment to the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port. The cables are available with a LC connector for attachment to the server or fabric component port.
The 50 micron cables (#141x features) are compatible with short-wave Fibre Channel/FICON host adapters (features #3153, #3157, and #3353).
The 9 micron cables (#142x features) are compatible with long-wave Fibre Channel/FICON adapters (features #3253, #3257, and #3453).
Features #1412 and #1422 provide a pigtail conversion cable that can be used to attach the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a cable with a LC connector.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: See description above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#145x) zHyperlink cable
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1450 40m zHyperlink cable 1451 150m zHyperlink cable
These optional features provide one zHyperlink cable to connect a zHyperlink adapter port to a server or port of the zHyperLink Express feature (#0431 in IBM z14).
Each cable is a single 24-fiber cable with Multi-fiber Termination Push-on (MTP) connectors. Internally, the single cable houses 12 fibers for transmit and 12 fibers for receive.
Two fiber type options are available with specifications supporting different distances for the zHyperLink Express:
- 150 m: OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 4.7 GHz-km at 850 nm
- 40 m: OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 2.0 GHz-km at 850 nm
- Minimum required: Zero
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites:
- Either features #1450 or #1451 require #3500 zHyperlink adapter
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1600) High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 1600 High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of 4U (4 EIA) flash enclosures pair used to support flash card. Each enclosure pair will be populated with 48 cards.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#161x) Flash card sets
(#1610) 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------- 1610 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1611 800 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1612 1600 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1613 3200 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1623 3.8 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1624 7.68 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1625 15.36 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash
These features provide a set of 16 flash cards.
Flash cards are installed in a flash enclosure pair (feature #1602). Each flash enclosure pair can support up to three flash drive sets (up to 48 flash drives). All the flash cards installed within a storage system can be intermixed with different capacity.
Every flash enclosure pair must be populated with either three flash card sets (features #161x), a combination of one flash card set and two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699), or a combination of two flash card sets and one flash enclosure filler set (feature #1699). If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the feature must be removed as #161x features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed flash cards when purchasing new flash card of a higher capacity. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The flash cards feature numbers 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1623 can be configured as RAID 5, 6, or 10. The flash card feature number 1624 and 1625 can be configured as RAID 6 only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, 1623: Six
- Feature 1624, 1625: 12 at system level (Initial order maximum: Six)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1602 and #1699 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Feature #1624 requires feature #1884 (LMC R8.4) to be ordered
- Feature #1625 requires feature #1885 (LMC R8.5) to be ordered
- Limitations: Cannot intermix different capacity within an enclosure pair. Systems with 512 GB of processor memory or less can support up to 512 TiB of formatted physical capacity with small extents or up to 2 PiB of formatted physical capacity with large extents. Systems with 1 TB of processor memory or more can support up to 2 PB of formatted physical capacity with small extents or up to 8 PiB of formatted physical capacity with large extents. The maximum Thin Provisioning capacity would be 2x the maximum formatted physical capacity.
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1699) Flash enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 flash enclosure fillers. If a flash enclosure pair (feature #1600) is populated with only 16 flash cards (one #161x feature), it must be populated with two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699).
If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the #1699 feature must be removed as #161x features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#188X) DS8000 LMC R8.X
(#1882) DS8000 LMC R8.2
(No longer available as of November 21, 2018)
(#1883) DS8000 LMC R8.3
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
(#1884) DS8000 LMC R8.4
(No longer available as of January 14, 2020)
Feature Description ------- --------------- 1882 DS8000 LMC R8.2 1883 DS8000 LMC R8.3 1884 DS8000 LMC R8.4 1885 DS8000 LMC R8.5
These features provide DS8000 Licensed Machine Code (LMC) R8.x corresponding to the appropriate bundle family.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install/field install:
- For feature #1882, #1883: Field only
- For feature #1884, #1885: Both
(#1906) Earthquake kit
This feature provides an optional seismic kit for stabilizing the storage unit rack, so that the rack complies with IBM earthquake resistance standards. It is important for computer systems to be adequately restrained during earthquakes. This helps to prevent human injury. It also ensures that the system will be available following the earthquake by limiting potential damage to critical system components such as hard drives.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1999) Hardware Installation MES
Feature Description ------- ------------------------- 1999 Hardware Installation MES
This feature provides IBM trained personnel to perform the hardware installation.
- Minimum required: One per hardware field install order
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Must be attached to any hardware field install order. This includes features #16xx, #3xxx, #4xxx, #5xxx, and #6xxx.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#2997) 3.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of eight disk enclosure fillers. If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1244) is populated with only eight disk drives (one #58x8 feature), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2997, the #2997 feature must be removed as #58x8 features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#2999) 2.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 disk enclosure fillers.
If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241) is populated with only 16 disk drives (one #5xx8 feature - except #58xx features), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the #2999 feature must be removed as features #5xx8 (except #58xx features) are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant / field install: Both
(#3053) Device adapter pair I
Feature Description ------- --------------------- 3053 Device adapter pair I
This feature provides two device adapters. Device adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure pair (one device adapter pair in each I/O enclosure). An I/O enclosure pair can support up to two device adapter pairs.
The required quantity of this feature is based upon only the number of disk enclosure pair features #1241 that are present within Model 986, and if present, Model 86E expansion units attached to Model 986 (identified using features #0241, #0242).
Since the third, fourth, and fifth Model 86E do not support I/O enclosure pairs, the device adapters for disk enclosures installed within the second Model 86E must be ordered on and installed within Model 986.
Refer to the table below to determine the required quantity of feature #3053.
With features #4422, #4423, or #4424:
Model Model Model Model
986 86E 86E 986
#1241 (#0241) (#0242) required
quantity #1241 #1241 #3053
quantity quantity quantity
-------- -------- -------- --------
1 - 1
2 - 2
2 4 3
2 4 1 4
Note: Device adapters for disk enclosures installed in the first Model 86E (identified using feature #0241) are ordered on and installed within that Model 86E. Therefore, the feature #1241 quantity within the first Model 86E is applicable for determining the required quantity of feature #3053 in Model 986. The feature #1241 quantity 1 on the second Model 86E will determine the additional device adapter on model 986.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#315x, #325x, #335x) Fibre Channel/FICON adapter PCIe
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 3153 8 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3157 8 Gb 8 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3253 8 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3257 8 Gb 8 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3353 16 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3453 16 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe
These features provide one either four or eight-port Fibre Channel/FICON host adapter. Host adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure. An I/O enclosure pair can support up to 32 host adapter ports. To support more than 32 host adapter ports, additional I/O enclosure pairs are required. For higher availability, it is recommended that adapters always be added in pairs and in a balanced manner across the machine.
Each adapter supports:
- Four or eight ports, each with a full duplex transfer rate at 1600 MB, 800 MB, 400 MB, or 200 MB per second
- SCSI-FCP ULP (Upper Layer Protocol) on point-to-point, fabric, and arbitrated loop (private loop) topologies
- FICON ULP on point-to-point and fabric topologies
Note: SCSI-FCP and FICON are not supported simultaneously on the same port.
Note: FC-AL Topology is not supported on 16GFC adapters.
Cables for connecting an adapter port to a server or fabric port can be purchased using the #141x and #142x features.
Feature #315x and #3353 are supported with 50 micron multimode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC connector.
Feature #325x and #3453 are supported with 9 micron single mode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC.
Feature conversions are available to exchange installed adapters when purchasing new adapters of a different type. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The combination of four ports and eight ports of host adapter cards cannot exceed 64 ports on the base model.
- Minimum required: None. A minimum of two #3153, #3253, #3157, #3257, #3353, or #3453 features of the same type are required.
- Maximum allowed per Model 986:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: 16
- Any combination of features #3157 or #3257: Eight
- Maximum allowed per multi-model system:
- Model 986 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: 32
- Any combination of features #3157 or #3257: 16
- Model 986 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#3500) zHyperlink adapter
This feature provides a one port zHyperlink adapter which resides in the PCIe G3 I/O drawer of the DS8880 and supports direct connectivity to IBM Z at distances up to 150 m.
- Minimum required: Zero
- Maximum allowed: Zero when feature #4422 (8-core processor) is present. Eight per system (Base and expansion frames) when feature #4423 (16-Core processor) is present. Twelve per system (Base and expansion frames) when feature #4424 (24-Core processor) is present. (Initial order maximum: Eight - Feature #3500 cannot be ordered in quantities of 1, 3, 5, or 7)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires features #1303 and LMC R8.3 (feature #1883) or higher. FICON connectivity to each IBM z14 connected via zHyperLinks.
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration. This feature can only be ordered in quantities of 2, 4, 6, or 8.
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: None
(#3601) Transparent cloud tiering 10Gb/1Gb ethernet pair for 4U controllers
This feature provides a pair of 2-port 10 Gbps SFP+ optical / 2-port 1Gbps RJ-45 copper longwave adapters (one for each one of the 4U central electronics complexes) to improve bandwidth for a native cloud storage tier in IBM Z environments.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires LMC R8.3 (Feature #1883) or higher
- Limitations: 10 km maximum distance
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#4xxx) Processor memory
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------------ 4324 128 GB processor memory (8-core only) 4325 256 GB processor memory (8-core only or 16-core) 4326 512 GB processor memory (16-core only) 4327 1,024 GB Processor memory (24-core only) 4328 2,048 GB Processor memory (24-core only)
Each feature designates the amount of processor memory installed in the machine.
Processor memory upgrades are processed as a feature conversion transaction. The transaction is invoiced at the differential price between the features removed and added.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites:
- Either features #4324 or #4325 require #4422 processor license feature
- Either features #4325 or #4326 require #4423 processor license feature
- Either features #4327 or #4328 require #4424 processor license feature
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field
(#4xxx) Processor memory
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------------ 4334 128 GB processor memory (8-core only) 4335 256 GB processor memory (8-core only or 16-core) 4336 512 GB processor memory (16-core only) 4337 1,024 GB Processor memory (24-core only) 4338 2,048 GB Processor memory (24-core only)
Each feature designates the amount of processor memory installed in the machine.
Processor memory upgrades are processed as a feature conversion transaction. The transaction is invoiced at the differential price between the features removed and added.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites:
- Either features #4334 or #4335 require #4422 processor license feature
- Either features #4335 or #4336 require #4423 processor license feature
- Either features #4337 or #4338 require #4424 processor license feature
- Require feature #1883
- Limitations: No intermix of feature #432x with #433x
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#442x) Processor license indicators
Feature Description ------- ----------------------------------- 4422 8-core processor license indicator 4423 16-core processor license indicator 4424 24-core processor license indicator
This feature provides a processor card corresponding to the appropriate system.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites:
- Features #4422 require either #4324 or #4325 processor memory feature
- Features #4423 require #4325 or #4326 processor memory feature
- Features #4424 require either #4327 or #4328 processor memory feature
- Limitations: Feature #4423 or #4424, is required to support feature #037x (expansion frame positions)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#5xx8) Disk drive sets
(#5308) 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5618) 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5868) 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
(No Longer Available as of November 22, 2017)
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 5308 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5618 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5708 600 GB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5768 1.2 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5778 1.8 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5868 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set 5878 6 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
These features provide a set of 16 disk drives, except features #58x8 which provide a set of eight disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241), except 4 TB disk drives which are installed in a 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair (features #12x4). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). Each 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair can support up to 24 disk drives. All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be the same type and same capacity.
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #5xx8), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999 or #2997), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999 or #2997). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999 or #2997, the feature must be removed as #5xx8 features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Six
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1242 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Features #1244 and #2997 may be required for features #58x8
- Limitations: No intermix between #5xxx and #6xxx features within an enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#6x58) SSD drive sets
(#6158) 400 GB SSD drive set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- -------------------- 6158 400 GB SSD drive set 6258 800 GB SSD drive set 6358 1.6 TB SSD drive set
Features #6x58 provide a set of 16 disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity).
With disk drive sets (16 drives per set), every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #6x58), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the feature must be removed as features #6x58 are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Six
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1245 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Limitations: All SSD drives installed within a disk enclosure must be of the same capacity type (features #6xxx)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#AGAE) Shipping and Handling - Model 986
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates each Model 986 on the order will have a
shipping and handling charge added to the order.
Note: Select either feature #AGAE or feature #AG00 on
the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
Chargeable features for Model 86E
(#0170) Top Expansion
This feature is used to indicate the expansion rack have exceed the 40U height. Additional materials are required to support the top hat expansion.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #1241 quantity exceeds two and seven for position 1 (feature #0241) and positions 2, 3 and 4 (features #0242/#0243/#0244) respectively or feature #1602 quantity exceeds three or feature #0170 already exists on Model 986
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1014) - Front & rear door lock kit
This feature code provides two sets of lock/keys (one for the front door, one for the rear door).
- Minimum required: 0
- Maximum allowed: 1 (Initial order maximum: 0)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: None
- Compatibility conflicts: None
- Customer setup: No
- Limitations: None
- Plant / Field installable: Both
- Cable order: None
- Comments: None
(#1052) Three Phase DC-UPS
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature provides the primary source of power for the storage system.
- Minimum required: Two
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: Either feature #1086, #1087, #1088, or #1089 must be selected
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
(#1055) Extended PLD
This optional feature provides extended protection from a power line disturbance (PLD).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: If feature #1055 is selected, it must be selected for all units in the 283x system. A 283x system is defined as the 283x base unit and all physically attached 283x expansion units.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#10xx) Three phase line cords
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------------------ 1086 Three phase power cord, 380-415V, 30A, 5 pin connector 1087 Three phase power cord, 200-240V, 30A, 4 pin connector 1088 Three phase power cord, 380-415V, 40A, no connector 1089 Three phase power cord, 200-240V, 60A, 4 pin connector
These features are used to specify a three phase power configuration.
These features provide two three phase power cords to supply external power to the machine and also can be used to order replacement line cords. These features also cover the top exit power cord and the cable you order is meant for top exit. Order feature code #1101 for the overhead ladder.
- Minimum required: One per feature number (select either feature #1086, #1087, #1088, or #1089)
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for features #1086, #1087, #1088, and #1089.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1242) HD STD enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- -------------------------- 1242 HD STD enclosure indicator
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the small form factor on the enclosure pair.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: Four if feature #0241 exists, eight for each model 86E if feature #0242, #0243 or #0244 exists
- Corequisites: Each #1242 feature requires one #5xxx feature. One of these features must be feature #5xx8 (excluding #58x8 features).
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a STD disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- #5xx8 features (excluding #58x8 features) can be installed within the same STD disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1244) 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
Feature Description ------- --------------------------------- 1244 3.5-inch disk enclosure indicator
This feature notifies manufacturing on the number of enclosures used to support 3.5-inch spinning hard disk drives. It will drive the bill of materials for the large form factor on the enclosure pair.
A 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair (feature #1244) supports up to 24 disk drives. The 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair is populated with either 8, 16, or 24 disk drives (features #58x8). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with only 8 or 16 disk drives, it must be populated with one or two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four if feature #0241 exists, eight for each model 86E if feature #0242, #0243 or #0244 exists
- Corequisites: Each #1244 feature requires one #58x8 feature
- Limitations:
- All disk drives installed within a 3.5-inch disk enclosure must be of the same type (capacity and speed)
- The #58x8 features can be installed within the same 3.5-inch disk enclosure as long as the drives are of the same type (capacity and speed)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#124x) Disk drive cables
Feature Description Corequisite ------- --------------------------------- ------------- 1247 Disk drive cable group B Feature #0241 1248 Disk drive cable group C Feature #0242 1249 Disk drive cable group D Feature #0243 1251 Disk drive cable group E Feature #0244 1252 Extended Disk drive cable group C Feature #0242 1253 Extended Disk drive cable group D Feature #0243 1254 Extended Disk drive cable group E Feature #0244
These features provide a complete set of Fibre Channel cables to connect all the disk drives (supported within the model) to their appropriate device adapters.
Selection of the appropriate feature is dependent upon the Model 8xE physical position (relative to the base unit) and base unit model number. The Model 986 indicator features (#02xx) are used to ensure the selection of the proper disk drive cable group feature.
If the Model 986 physical position (relative to the base unit) or the base unit model number is changed, a new disk drive cable group feature is required. A new disk drive cable group is obtained by ordering a feature remove of the installed #124x feature and a feature add of a new 124x feature.
The Extended Disk drive cable is meant for expansion frame place on adjacent position. The length is 20 meters.
- Minimum required: One
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: See table above
- Limitations:
- If feature #0241 is ordered, the maximum drives supported is 192
- If features #0242, #0243 or #0244 are ordered, the maximum drives supported is 384
- Change from feature #1252 to #1248 is not allowed
- Change from feature #1253 to #1249 is not allowed
- Change from feature #1254 to #1251 is not allowed
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1303) I/O enclosure pair PCIe G3
This feature provides two I/O enclosures. An I/O enclosure pair supports up to two device adapter pairs, four PCIe connection to support the flash enclosure, and up to eight host adapters.
- Minimum required: Two
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: Feature #1303 is not compatible with feature #0242, #0243 or #0244
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1400) Top exit bracket
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 1400 Top exit bracket for Fibre cable
This feature provides the bracket to secure the Fibre cables and power line cords routed to the top of the system.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Feature #1101 may be required for feature #1400
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#141x - 142x) Fibre Channel/FICON cables
Feature Description
------- ----------------------------------------------------------------
1410 50 micron, 40 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connectors
1411 50 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable multimode with LC
connector
1412 50 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable multimode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
1420 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connectors
1421 9 micron, 31 meter Fibre Channel cable singlemode with LC
connector
1422 9 micron, 2 meter Fibre Channel conversion cable singlemode with
a LC connector and SC receptacle
These optional features provide one Fibre Channel cable to connect a Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a server or fabric component port.
Each cable has a LC connector for attachment to the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port. The cables are available with a LC connector for attachment to the server or fabric component port.
The 50 micron cables (#141x features) are compatible with short-wave Fibre Channel/FICON host adapters (feature #3153, #3157, and #3353).
The 9 micron cables (#142x features) are compatible with long-wave Fibre Channel/FICON adapters (feature #3253, #3257, and #3453).
Features #1412 and #1422 provide a pigtail conversion cable that can be used to attach the Fibre Channel/FICON adapter port to a cable with a LC connector.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites: See description above
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#145x) zHyperlink cable
Feature Description ------- ---------------------- 1450 40m zHyperlink cable 1451 150m zHyperlink cable
These optional features provide onezHyperlink cable to connect a zHyperlink adapter port to a server or port of the zHyperLink Express feature (#0431 in IBM z14).
Each cable is a single 24-fiber cable with Multi-fiber Termination Push-on (MTP) connectors. Internally, the single cable houses 12 fibers for transmit and 12 fibers for receive.
Two fiber type options are available with specifications supporting different distances for the zHyperLink Express:
- 150 m: OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 4.7 GHz-km at 850 nm
- 40 m: OM4 50/125 micrometer multimode fiber optic cable with a fiber bandwidth at wavelength: 2.0 GHz-km at 850 nm
- Minimum required: Zero
- Maximum allowed: 99
- Corequisites:
- Either features #1450 or #1451 require #3500 zHyperlink adapter
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1600) High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------------ 1600 High Performance Flash Enclosure Gen2 pair
This feature notifies Manufacturing on the number of 4U (4 EIA) flash enclosures pair used to support flash card. Each enclosure pair will be populated with 48 cards.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Two
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#161x) Flash card sets
(#1610) 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- ------------------------------------- 1610 400 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1611 800 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1612 1600 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1613 3200 GB 2.5-inch flash card set 1623 3.8 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1624 7.68 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash 1625 15.36 TB 2.5-inch high capacity flash
These features provide a set of 16 flash cards.
Flash cards are installed in a flash enclosure pair (feature #1602). Each flash enclosure pair can support up to three flash drive sets (up to 48 flash drives). All the flash cards installed within a storage system can be intermixed with different capacity.
Every flash enclosure pair must be populated with either three flash card sets (features #161x), a combination of one flash card set and two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699), or a combination of two flash card sets and one flash enclosure filler set (feature #1699). If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the feature must be removed as #161x features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed flash cards when purchasing new flash card of a higher capacity. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The flash cards feature numbers 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, and 1623 can be configured as RAID 5, 6, or 10. The flash card feature number 1624 and 1625 can be configured as RAID 6 only.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Feature 1610, 1611, 1612, 1613, 1623: Six
- Feature 1624, 1625: 12 at system level (Initial order maximum: Six)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1602 and #1699 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Feature #1624 requires feature #1884 (LMC R8.4) to be ordered
- Feature #1625 requires feature #1885 (LMC R8.5) to be ordered
- Limitations: Cannot intermix different capacity within an enclosure pair. Systems with 512 GB of processor memory or less can support up to 512 TiB of formatted physical capacity with small extents or up to 2 PiB of formatted physical capacity with large extents. Systems with 1 TB of processor memory or more can support up to 2 PB of formatted physical capacity with small extents or up to 8 PiB of formatted physical capacity with large extents. The maximum Thin Provisioning capacity would be 2x the maximum formatted physical capacity.
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1699) Flash enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 flash enclosure fillers. If a flash enclosure pair (feature #1600) is populated with only 16 flash cards (one #161x feature), it must be populated with two flash enclosure filler sets (feature #1699).
If a flash enclosure pair is populated with feature #1699, the #1699 feature must be removed as #161x features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1906) Earthquake kit
This feature provides an optional seismic kit for stabilizing the storage unit rack, so that the rack complies with IBM earthquake resistance standards. It is important for computer systems to be adequately restrained during earthquakes. This helps to prevent human injury. It also ensures that the system will be available following the earthquake by limiting potential damage to critical system components such as hard drives.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#1999) Hardware Installation MES
Feature Description ------- ------------------------- 1999 Hardware Installation MES
This feature provides IBM trained personnel to perform the hardware installation.
- Minimum required: One per hardware field install order
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: Must be attached to any hardware field install order. This includes features #16xx, #3xxx, #4xxx, #5xxx, and #6xxx.
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Field install only
(#2997) 3.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of eight disk enclosure fillers. If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1244) is populated with only eight disk drives (one #58x8 feature), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2997).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2997, the #2997 feature must be removed as #58x8 features are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Eight if feature #0241 is ordered, sixteen if either feature #0242, #0243 or #0244 is ordered
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#2999) 2.5-inch disk enclosure filler set
This feature provides a set of 16 disk enclosure fillers.
If a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241) is populated with only 16 disk drives (one #5xx8 feature - except #58xx features), it must be populated with two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999).
If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the #2999 feature must be removed as features #5xx8 (except #58xx features) are added.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Eight if feature #0241 is ordered, sixteen if either feature #0242, #0243 or #0244 is ordered
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant / field install: Both
(#3053) Device adapter pair I
Feature Description ------- --------------------- 3053 Device adapter pair I
This feature provides two device adapters. Device adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure pair (one device adapter pair in each I/O enclosure). An I/O enclosure pair can support up to two device adapter pairs.
This feature is only supported on the first Model 86E attached to a Model 986 (identified using feature #0241).
The required quantity of this feature is based upon only the number of disk enclosure pair features present in the subsequent Model 85E.
Refer to the table below to determine the required quantity of feature #3053.
Model 86E with #0241 - #1241 quantity Model 86E Model
with 86E -
#0242/3/4 Required
- #1241 #3053
quantity quantity
----------------------------------------- --------- --------
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 (Required #3053 Qty 1 on the Model 986) 4 3
4 (Required #3053 Qty 1 on the Model 986) 5 4
Model Model
86E - 86E -
#3053 Required
quantity #1303
quantity
-------- --------
1-4 2
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: Four
- Corequisites: Two #1303 features are required for up to four #3053 features
- Limitations: Feature #3053 is not compatible with feature #0242, #0243, or #0244
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#315x, #325x, #335x) Fibre Channel/FICON adapter PCIe
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------------- 3153 8 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3157 8 Gb 8 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3253 8 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3257 8 Gb 8 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3353 16 Gb 4 port SW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe 3453 16 Gb 4 port LW FCP/FICON adapter PCIe
These features provide one either four or eight-port Fibre Channel/FICON host adapter. Host adapters are installed in an I/O enclosure. An I/O enclosure pair can support up to 32 host adapter ports. To support more than 32 host adapter ports, additional I/O enclosure pairs are required. For higher availability, it is recommended that adapters always be added in pairs and in a balanced manner across the machine.
Each adapter supports:
- Four or eight ports, each with a full duplex transfer rate at 1600 MB, 800 MB, 400 MB, or 200 MB per second
- SCSI-FCP ULP (Upper Layer Protocol) on point-to-point, fabric, and arbitrated loop (private loop) topologies
- FICON ULP on point-to-point and fabric topologies
Note: SCSI-FCP and FICON are not supported simultaneously on the same port.
Note: FC-AL Topology is not supported on 16GFC adapters.
Cables for connecting an adapter port to a server or fabric port can be purchased using the #141x and #142x features.
Feature #315x and #3353 are supported with 50 micron multimode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC connector.
Feature #325x and #3453 are supported with 9 micron single mode Fibre optic cables terminated with a LC.
Feature conversions are available to exchange installed adapters when purchasing new adapters of a different type. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
The combination of four ports and eight ports of host adapter cards cannot exceed 64 ports on the base model.
- Minimum required: None. A minimum of two #3153, #3253, #3157, #3257, #3353, or #3453 features of the same type are required.
- Maximum allowed per Model 986:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: 16
- Any combination of features #3157, or #3257: Eight
- Maximum allowed per multi-model system:
- Model 986 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Any combination of features #3153, #3253, #3353, or #3453: 32
- Any combination of features #3157, or #3257: 16
- Model 986 plus one expansion unit attached:
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#3500) zHyperlink adapter
This feature provides a one port zHyperlink adapter which resides in the PCIe G3 I/O drawer of the DS8880 and supports direct connectivity to IBM Z at distances up to 150 m.
- Minimum required: Zero
- Maximum allowed: Zero when feature #4422 (8-core processor) is present. Eight per system (Base and expansion frames) when feature #4423 (16-Core processor) is present. Twelve per system (Base and expansion frames) when feature #4424 (24-Core processor) is present. (Initial order maximum: Eight - Feature #3500 cannot be ordered in quantities of 1, 3, 5, or 7)
- Prerequisites: None
- Corequisites: This feature requires features #1303 and LMC R8.3 (feature #1883) or higher. FICON connectivity to each IBM z14 connected via zHyperLinks.
- Limitations: 150 m maximum distance in a point to point configuration. This feature can only be ordered in quantities of 2, 4, 6, or 8.
- Plant install / field install: Both
- Comments: None
(#5xx8) Disk drive sets
(#5308) 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5618) 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set
(#5868) 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
(No Longer Available as of November 22, 2017)
Feature Description ------- -------------------------------- 5308 300 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5618 600 GB 15,000 rpm disk drive set 5708 600 GB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5768 1.2 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5778 1.8 TB 10,000 rpm disk drive set 5868 4 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set 5878 6 TB 7,200 rpm half drive set
These features provide a set of 16 disk drives, except features #58x8 which provide a set of eight disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241), except 4 TB disk drives which are installed in a 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair (features #12x4). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). Each 3.5-inch disk enclosure pair can support up to 24 disk drives. All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be the same type and same capacity.
Every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #5xx8), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999 or #2997), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999 or #2997). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999 or #2997, the feature must be removed as #5xx8 features are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Maximum quantity is 12 if feature #0241 is ordered
- Maximum quantity is 24 if feature #0242, #0243, or #0244 are ordered
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1241 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Features #1244 and #2997 may be required for features #58x8
- Limitations: No intermix between #5xxx and #6xxx features within an enclosure
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#6x58) SSD drive sets
(#6158) 400 GB SSD drive set
(No longer available as of September 30, 2019)
Feature Description ------- -------------------- 6158 400 GB SSD drive set 6258 800 GB SSD drive set 6358 1.6 TB SSD drive set
Features #6x58 provide a set of 16 disk drives.
Disk drives are installed in a disk enclosure pair (feature #1241). Each disk enclosure pair can support up to three disk drive sets (up to 48 disk drives). All the disk drives installed within a disk enclosure pair must be of the same type (capacity).
With disk drive sets (16 drives per set), every disk enclosure pair must be populated with either three disk drive sets (features #6x58), a combination of one disk drive set and two disk enclosure filler sets (feature #2999), or a combination of two disk drive sets and one disk enclosure filler set (feature #2999). If a disk enclosure pair is populated with feature #2999, the feature must be removed as features #6x58 are added. Feature conversions are available to exchange installed disk drives when purchasing new disk drives of a higher capacity and/or speed. The conversions are a returned parts MES.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed:
- Maximum quantity is 12 if feature #0241 is ordered
- Maximum quantity is 24 if feature #0242, #0243, or #0244 are ordered
- Corequisites:
- Additional #1245 and #2999 features may be required
- Additional #3053 features may be required
- Additional 283x Value Unit Function Authorization features may be required to upgrade authorization and enablement levels
- Limitations: All SSD drives installed within a disk enclosure must be of the same capacity type (features #6xxx)
- Plant install / field install: Both
(#AGAF) Shipping and Handling - Model 86E
(No longer available as of June 30, 2020)
This feature indicates each Model 86E on the order will have a
shipping and handling charge added to the order.
Note: Select either feature #AGAF or feature #AG00 on
the order.
- Minimum required: None
- Maximum allowed: One
- Corequisites: None
- Limitations: None
- Plant install / field install: Plant only
Back to top
Accessories
None.
Customer replacement parts
None.
Back to top
Supplies
None.
Supplemental media
None.
Back to top
Trademarks
(R), (TM), * Trademark or registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation.
** Company, product, or service name may be a trademark or service mark of others.
UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited.
Terms of use
IBM products and services which are announced and available in your country can be ordered under the applicable standard agreements, terms, conditions, and prices in effect at the time. IBM reserves the right to modify or withdraw this Sales Manual at any time without notice. This Sales Manual is provided for your information only. Additional terms of use are located at
 |
© IBM Corporation 2021.